T HE | — 
NATURAL METHOD 2 
Ir E A C H I N G 


BEING THE 


aCCIDENCE 


QUESTIONS "ao AN WER 85 
Explained, amended, abridged, and fitted 5 the 


Capacity and Ule of the Lowes T © O RM. 


Leading the Learner 


LETTERS to SYLLABLES. 
SYLLABLES to WorDs. 

rom WORDS to SENTENCES. I. Single. 2. Com- 
pounded. Where is added an Acccunt of the 
Tranſpoſition, and moſt uſual F. Wotts of Words. 


in a_ Sentence. 


I. ExxNMPLESs to be irate 
by perpetual, NI. RuLes to direct the Imitation. 
plain, eaſy, <III. Extrcises Latin and Eugliſb to al- 


and neceſſary certain the Imitation by the Duin of 
the RuL Es. 


Into which is inſerted, 


. A Vocanurlany of Engliſh and Latin Words under 
each Part of Speech, reduced into tolerable Order, 


Il. SrWTENTIX PUERILES, Engliſb and Latin, con- 
ſting of the ſame Words put into plain Sentences un- 
der every Syntactick Rule. | 


By SAMUEL HOADLY, NM. 2 75 


fs 


The Ninth Gdition, yer moꝛe fitted fo2 the uſe of the lowed Fozm- 


? BY | — 


B L MO ME: 
* b for T. AsTLEY at ho * in St. Pauls church. Tard. 92 2 


* 


| „ re pe bt 
% * FAY ay, 4 I l — 
1 1 af” - 


Þ 
| af 


MYSEVM 
BRITAN 


NICVM 


4 ws . 4 Ia" 


PRE FA 


rr is nt the deſign of this Book to lay afide the Common Grammar, 
which ever has been here conſcientiouſly taught, and ſhall be fo, until 
Authority hall pleaſe to conſider its merits : Bat rather to make the 
Bic way to a ſpeedy and uſeful progreſs in it with underſtanding and chear- 
nel, without the tediouſneſs of two or three lines at a Leſſon by a paultry 
IC onſtruing- Book, and thoſe not under ſtocd, nor applied to uſe, And hereby the 
/ intention of the Accidence is recalled, which was by intelligible Engliſh 
ales, &c. to prepare the Learner for the Latin Grammar, and the Preface 
by it ſappoſes a uuilti tude of Exemples 7 be given, and the Learner both 


YL 


W/: to turn Latin into Engliſh, and Engliſh into Latin before he be put into 


Wt the variety of teaching it, is, and always will be diverſe, : 
Woes ſuch directions about it as are here followed. And there Authority it- 
bf not only leaves each man to make his beſt uſe of the Accigence, but invites 
„ 10 do His beſt to make it gain its end. It is not amiſs (you read 
gere) if one ſeeing by trial an eaſier and readier way than the 
Simon ſozt of Teachers do, would fay (7. e. pub/iþ) what he 
Sth proved, and foz the commodity allowed; that others not 
nowing the ſame might by erpcrience pzove the like; (rohich 75 
U 7 dire) and then by pꝛoof reaſonably judge the like, not here⸗ 


ſon (ti/l that be done) foz bidding the wozſe» And therefore taking 


it a) far as could be: That which JI have here endeavoured, is to find out 
| way to make it as uſeful as it is capable of being, by giving light to 
Pat was dark, and perſpicuity to what was obſcure; by omitting that 2045s 
let, and deferring what was not fit to be taught; by limiting what was 
left, and refifying what was falſe; but eſpecially by putting life and 
gur into what is otherwi/e dead, by abundance of plain and eaſy Exem- 
in both Tongues adjuſtes parallel ta each other every where; and by 
Pucing the ephole into ſuch order and method, that every thing might be 
din its proper place, and every operation done in its proper ſeaſon, the 
mer making way for the latter, and both interchangeabiy giving and re- 
ping light and ſtrength, ſo that no one motion might claſh and interfere 
1 anther, none anticipate another, nor unſeaſonably interpoſe itſelf. This 
bat, I ſay, which was endeavoured; but how far the performance has 
Pered the deſign muſt be left to others to judge; yet thus much may with 
0 be affirmed, that the ſucceſs upon ſome years trial has been ſuch, where 
in been rightly uſed, as fully proves that the meaſures have not altogether 
' miſtaken; for the confirmation of which, I refer myſelf (which is all 
th modeſty I can do) to the experience of thoſe that have tried it, or 
*, ozon eyes that will candidly come and ſee; but I appeal from 
/ thoſe that judge before they try, to ſuch indeed it will not 
44.2, chat children of ſeven or eight years of age ſoculd within toe 
Az. | fit 


: 
by 
þ 
5 
f 
mn 
* 
q 


WW other 3 it condemns the poſting haſte that is too uſual; and affirming 


p excluding the better way when it is found, but in the mean 


+ Accidence for the ground-work, and keeping to the matter and words 


"#4 
a ju 0 
8 


1 we 
1 : . 
n — eto, — Lt 
EC oe 7 J — 
2 2 ates : Sh mon 
. ͤ . I ES ES as 
r * — 8 Yo 3 
— = WE x} A» \ 
oy — K £32 # 5 FR" — 
— . _— * 9 jp ha —— 


= I F 4 
& > . 
8 2 of : l 1 
N Ire * A 1 18 * 0 þ 7+ ie oy HO . N r 
4 * 4 . W 3 . "EN 12 ; * — 
— — 8 * So jj 2 eee 1 n [x Body as 2H : ** — * . _ 
4 — — N N. * 8 1 7 a. — — » \ 
vy * — 5 — 5 22 0 x 
. = _ 4 * - — —ů * — — ” _—_— ” OI. . 2 - * ſl 4 _—_— a te + n — 
< \ 1 — - * « -1 > 4 — * — 2. - * 5 — - 7 ys 
2 4 — ” * "0 _ _ or ws — 2 . N A . Ly r Woo. „ 2 - pory _ „ nd vp 2 — _— = a * bo 2 — 2 
4 3 * 2 . ho od : 22> wet _ - 42; — N 2) > N PCS 2 — * - — — 
— IA * 4 ' ANCE i es — D * ce Zin line — ; $I" N — Ce ene et rn.» vw 
2 . 1 3 2 5 * * * N — P 2 * 5 — = gore +4 a p 22 * * _ — _ * — 4 N _ _— * — 2 8 
. L q , - — — 1 — on Pere — 4 C 8 8 rr 1 F : 
ne 75 "= n a l 0 , ——_ — —_ 2 14 9 * p — : Fes ti +» + 08 a —— Rn — 2 Pp 0 l \ , 
> F a we oy w* 4 4 A & —Ww" ” PI . 25.4 * — * * 7 7 4 — * =, 1 
— * — — 0 — — * Fa I * p —_—— 2 = ns =" £52 2 — 5 
, — + «2 * * : l 1 — F — D . . 


„ rn Ns. 1. Ih > 


4 + * 
q — : ip 
— 
bf aX* kg 


1 
— 
LEN PT» 
——ä— — 


iv Wm PREFACE 


firſt year not only have in readineſs in their heads, a Vocabulary of almil al 
the primitive uſtal words, and know to which part they belong, be able . 
form off all Participles from any Verb, and to decline readily any decling, 
word in the Number, Caje, Mood, Tenſe, or Perſon called for, but mak y 
infinity of ſhort plain Sentences ( even as many as may be made of the wi 
iy the Vocabulary) without recurring to a Dictionary, in true, plain Latin 
and in a ſbort time after run through the Latin Grammar and the pling 
parts of Corderius with eaſe and delight, yet this we have frequently ſon; 
ſo great is the difference between ſetting people to work with and within Ty] 
and Materials; or between driving them with a whip through thick and tibi 
over bills and dates, precipices and lumbling-vlocks in the dark, and leadiy 
them by the hand through the plegſanteſt and moſt ſurprizing proſpecti in thi 

daylight. 

. 1 would have it remembred, that this Book is but the firſt of four wn 
deſigned to comprebend the whole of what is needful for Scholars, to prejan 
them to converſe to the beſt advantage with any good Authors of the thr 
tengues, and ty become ſuch themſelves, aud pretends only to lay the foundatin 
and eflabliſh the ground-work, upon which the other in their order are . 
fuper/iruft; and foundations, thy" they ſhould be ſolid, yet are neceſſarily ri, 
Here is given only a general ſcheme, and the leading Rules; many particular 
ties, many more ob/ervables, exceptions, anomalies, &c, are here omitted whil 
will find their place and time hereafter. It was not therefore intended ibi 
this ſhould be a full and perfect Grammar, there is need of a longer time, nin 
age, and a greater underſtanding for that; nor know J any thing more fuli 
than the prepoflerons haſte of filling Childrens heads with what they are nf 

» yet in capacity to apprehend, retains or apply to preſent uſe. And if thin i 
any thing in this Bock that may ſeem better deferr'd, I would adviſe that ti 
learner be directed to Skip it. For all that was here intended is, 

1. Togive ſo many Eremples as were judged neceſſary to give light tot 
Rules and to direct the practice upon them. | 

2. To propoſe Rules true, plain and directive, but thoſe only the main a 
general ones, wh:ch being but few, are yet ſuch as that to them all that il 
follow hereafter may be referred and reduced without change in the Method 
I mean all farther Obſervables, all Irregularities and Exceptions, all 
riations, &c. and to add ſuch Explications and Limitations on!y as the pi 
ſent defign required. 

3. To make the Exerciſes and Jmitations ſo eaſy and ſo many, as ni! 

certainly introduce an habit of performing every operation aright. 
4. To digeſt under every part of Speech a Vocabulary of the Wards bein 
ng to it, in ſuch order as might beſt aſſiſt the Judgment in the true meanil 
of the Word, and the Memory in retaining it. In which Vocabulary car 
taken that only the mojt uſual Words may appear, and thoſe moſtly Primi 
with deſign that from them here firſt learned, might in the next Book bel 
derly deduced all their Derivatives and Compounds, by plain and ſure Rui 
which will, beyond imagination, facilitate the knowledge of the uh 9 
of words in the Latin Tongue : As for inſtance, after they have learnt li 
zu bat doctum, lectum, auditum, and all the other Supines ſignify, and th 
have a Rule given, that from the frſt Supine by changing um in or iH 

1 : 


I Wine 9 FE 
TT * 


e 
= ry 2e 


FE IEA 
m3 
— 


n 
2 


— . a 1 ( 


— 


j 
1 


1 The PN EF AC E. 5 v 


— 4 a — * 
Man Subſtantive which ſignifies the Doer, as from doctum to teach, doctor 
h teacher ; lectum 70 read, leaor a reader 3 will not a voy of the meaneſt ca- 
nat WE pacity be able 10 tell 20hat auditor, emptor, creator, ſervator, and all the ref 
kn pnify ? So if he by this Book know what ducere, pellere, trahere, vo- 
wird, care, &c. gnifies 3 and then inthe next that ad when compounded ſignifies 0, 
.atin, pro forth, re back, &c. as adducere to bring to, producere to bring forth, 
ain} reducere 7 bring bark, will he not eafily proceed to tell at firſt fight that 
ſeen adtrahere, protrahere, retrahere, advocare, provocare, revocare, advolare, 
t Tal provolare, revolare; adgredi, progredi, regredi, &c. /ignify And of 


1 thin, 
eading 
in cen 


aubat they are compounded ? | 
F. To cauſe the ſame words to be fetched over again in the Genders Com- 
L pariſons, Declenſions, Conjugations, and Syntaftick Rules, to keep them and 
all their Accidents and Declinations in memory, and ſo fix them that they be 


- or fer ix no danger of being loft. | 

e . To /ettle every thing in its proper place: For I can't be of their opinion, 
tum that think there is no need of an exact method ix teaching, or that in ſpelling 
datin Fand ig no great matter whether the child be taught to begin with a or n 
are H ir d; nor am I able to judge any thing more irrational and perplexing, than 
'y ru WS 1: /et people to do that fiſt, rhich cannot be done till ſome other thing that is 
icular' preſuppoſed to it be done; as for exemple, to tell the Learner, That the 
big Adjective muſt be made to agree with its Subſtantive in the ſame Caſe, 
{ed tht Gender, and Number, and require him to practiſe upon it, while as yet be 
ne, nn bus 0 4n0wledge in what Caſe the Subſtantive ovght to be put which the 
e fal Adjective 7s 1% comply with, &c. . 


Arte Nl 
thert l 


that tht 


7. To keep every word in its natural erder, and the Sentence in its plain and 
| imple dreſs, and not to omit ſo much as ego, or tu, or homo, &c. nor to 
tranſpoſe any word until the Learner be capable of knowing why and when 
ſub Ellipſes and Tranſpoſitions 2may be made; ner to interpaſe a double 
ſp Sentence till the nature” and make of ſingle ones be perfectly learned. 
| 8. To circumſcribe and define the limits and bounas of the Tongue, and ſhetn 
Jie Learner his ſtages, and the utmoſt goal, that he may ſee his courſe and its 


ht to tt 


maln 41 


that , and know what words may and what may not be put together; than which 
Method 1015 ing 75 more needful to be done. | 4 

all N One thing I have been told of, as going too far out of 1b, common road, 
the e ubieh yer I cannot prevail with myſelf to alter, and that is \the beginning at 


%%“ Infinite, and fr laying down diſtinctly the three principal endings, 
as ni . the Infinite, fienifying Imperfectly, the Finite ſignifying Perfectly, 


jars the Supine, and from thence deducing ſeverally the Perſons, Tenſes, &c. 
Wenifning Imperfecily, and then thoſe fignifying Perfectiy, &c. for this ap- 


4; beim 


mani pe, Je natural even to them that have not objerved it, that our Conftruers 
ry cgi vocito to call, nigreo te be black; and our Difionary-makers Jay, to 
rm ve amo, and to do ago, both which are falſe ; this way jo plainly diffin- 
3ook be ie n1/bes the Conjugations, and gives cccafion for the diflinda\acclining of the 
ſure Mulm perfect and Perſect Tor/os {the confounding of which Varto ſomewhere de 
bole li L. L. 1 remember juſtly blame: and obviates ſo many miſtakes of our Latin- 
arnei lakers, that I ronld not forvenr following the great Comenius in it, as 
, and ging that nothing was wanting to ring it ts prevail 2 ail the other 


rue, but to fbew the benefits of it, | 
1 


1 
ö 
i 
j 


1 
| 


WH [|] The PREFACE. 


6— e—————_— n 


ny os bao it may be uſed to the beſt advantage, the way that we bay 


found beſt is this, | | 

1. To read to the child ſo much as we judge fit at a time, and to requiny 
him to read it after us with exactneſs, well obſerving the guantity, accent, &c. 
of every Syllable, and marking it with a Pen where need is, and contin 
this till it ſeems no longer needful. . 

2. To explain it, and by familiar Queſtions make him underſtand the med. 
ing and uſe of each part, and without rigour trying his Memory, and aſſifling 
Bim by prompting him with the Engliſh, Sc. | 

3. To put him upon getting all that perfectly by heart which is neceſſary, 
but the Imitations are only to be turned by word of mouth from the one lan- 
guage to the other. 

4. To bring him quickly to write legibly, that for his daily exerciſes in 
and out of School he may on his foul Book write out Exemples of each De. 
clenſion and Conjugation, and Compariſons, and then proceed to the Exemply 
of the Syntax; which when and as they are daily corrected ſhould be copied 
fairly into another Book, to be kept by them and fhewn to their friends fir 
their jatisfation, for the Maſter's credit and the Boy's encouragement. 

To conclude, I take the reaſon and end of a School to be great and ſubline, 
it is no leſs than the regular management of Youth, by Power, Wiſdom, and 
Goodnels, ander good diſcipline, and the inſlrufting, exerciſing and habi- 
tuating them to all that they are to know, will or do while in that flat, 
and to all that may be of uſe to them in their future life, ſo that thy 
may come out of the School, prepared for all that Duty they have to do ti 
wards God, men, or themſelves. | | 

And it is a very great truft that is repoſed in Maſters, and there is nil 
of a great many good qualifications in one that undertakes a charge ui 
which ſo much depends; and no Skill, care or pains can be too much in bin 
who is bound by all obligations, 

I. To keep the glorious End always in his and his charges eye. 

II. To fearch out diligently, and uſe reſolutely, the ſure FBeang that uil 
infallibly lead to, and gain the End. 

III. To fudy and apply the readieſt, plaineſt, and eaſieſt Gays ani 
Methods of /o v/ing theſe means, that the defigned End may certain!y it 
attained by all that refuſe not to follow them. | 

This is the ſumm of our work, and this I think we ſhould look upon as it 
common intereſt and concern to advance, that while other Arts and Scienit! 
are daily improving and gaining greater perfection, ours only lie not i 
its firſt rudiments. | 

What ] have been doing this way has been only in reſpe# to the public 
good, and from a deſire to be ſome way ſerviceable to my Country. If ai 


good be done I have my end; and if any like not this Eſſay, they may plea | ; 


to let it alone, and there's no hurt done. 
From Brook-heuſ? 


in Hackney. 8. H : 


THE 


* 


ACCIDENCE: 
- | : 
19 | 

pied | 

fir | 

„I LATIN TONE. 
0 | 

WA . W | 1 
fats, | | | 

” CHAPTER I. | 

js nee Concerning the Latin Letters. 

e Up | 

in hin 


Lueſtion, OW many are the Letters uſed in the Latin Tongue 2 

i 1. Anſwer, The Latin Letters are two and twenty. 
„ | The 22 Letters in Great Characters, 

at i ABCDEFGHI, JLMNOPQRSTUor VXYZ. 

The 22 Letters in Small Characters, | 

| abcdefghior jlmnopqrſor stuorvxy2. 

Q How are theſe twenty two Letters divided? 

2. A. Letters are divided into Vowels and Conſonants. 

bat is a Vazwel ? | | 

3. 4. A Vowel is a Letter, which is a full and perfect ſound of itſelf 


pg and 
ainlj be 


n 4s Our 
| $crencts 


2 710! 5 Without a Conſonant. 
DO IQ, How many Letters be Vowel: ? 
pu 4. A. Theſe fix Letters, a, e, i, o, u, y, are Vowels. | 
If 1 EY. 4re the fix Vowels always pronounced with the ſame length? 
pay Piet 4. The ſix Vowels are ſometimes pronounced ſhort, and ſometimes 
1 ny is ſhort, . FT met is ſhort, „ F fin is ſhort, 
made 1s long, n 7 mete is long, ; 3 fine is long, 
IX Pre is ſhort, - {cur is ſhort, . $ hypocrite is ſhort, 
robe is long, 2 a is long, FD ſoyle is long. 


* . » . — 
* * A — — > . CI ad s = = * 
pray — wo mw . : toe”. . - Sl IS F — 
r- 2 r 
3 22 


— — — 
47 — 
— ha — 

_ is K 


— 
” 


— 
r 
POLE IN * 8 

4 to 


8 Pk Letters and Syllables, Chap, 1 


ht r * — 
Q. How may a Learner know when they are ſhort, and when 2 
6. A. In this Book, where it is needful, 
The ſhort Vowel ſhall be marked thus (ä) as 65, vir, per. 
The long Vowel ſhall be marked thus (a) as 05, ver, par. 
Q. Is there then ſuch care to be taken about the length of the Vine, 
7. A. Yes, a moſt exact care is to be taken, 
1. That where. ever a Vowel is ſhort, it be ſtill pronounced ſhox: 
miles, eques, Es, Eft, &r. which you muſt not pronounce milẽs, equẽs, &; 9 
| 2. That where-evera Vowel is long, it be pronounced long, 7% 
mũs, mos, honos, jus, amas, c. which you muſt not pronounce 08, mk ” 
mos, honos, jus, amas. | 4 
Q. Now try how you can pronounce the Vowels in theſe, doces, imir 
PateEre, patere, Parere, Parere, sũs, virtũs, clictilis, vEsIca, umbilic\, Fi 
pElox, precox, felix, filix, fax, audix, nex, rex. - 
QQ. What is a Conſonant ? | 
8. A. A Conſonant is a Letter, that is to be founded with a Von! 
Q. How many Conſonants are theres | 
9. A. The other ſixteen Letters be Conſonants, b, e, d, &. 
Q. Now tell me which of theſe be Vowels, and which Conſonants, 
| | e, f, g, a, I, m, o, n, r, i, p, s, t, u, vy. 


CHAP. II. 5 
Of Syllables, 


'T HAT is ts be dene with theſe Letters? 
10. A. The uſe of theſe Letters is to make Syllables. 
Q. How many Letters go to miake a Syllable ? 
31. A. I. Sometimes one Letter makes a Syllable; as, a, e, i, o, 
II. Sometimes 720 Letters go to the making of a Syllavie; 
ab eb ib ob ub yb. | 
b ie % e , 
NM. B. 1. Theſe Syllables, æ, &, ai, ei, oi, au, eu, are called Diphthoo ie. / 


SM 


2. Inſtead of æ and @ we commonly pronounce e. 25. 
pa be bi be bu by. of! 

| tw ce .ci-- on ©6 Iv. 1 
III. Sometimes three Letters go to make a Syllable; as, Pd. 


bab beb bib bob bub byb. | dad ded did dod dud d 
eo cur cyr. rae res ris ros rus . 
IV. Some Syllables conſiſt of feur Letters; as, part, pain, far, finh# 
Faul, foul, reſt, waſt, hart, &c. | 

V. Some Syllables conſiſt of five Letters; as, mount, ſlain, bring, 
trip, flart, quart, print. 

VI. Sometimes there are {x Letters in one 8y able; as, frript. ft 
ſought, fought, caught, fright, bright, &c. | F 
Mo tell me how many Letters art in each of theſe Syllables: Al 
love and praiſe the Child, that minds his Book, and 844 


[ 


1 
2 ä 


©: ip. 111. IV. Or the Eight Parts of Speech, 
| CHAP, Il. 
Concerning W. ords.. 


] | \ 
; HAT is to be Jane with the Sy/lables ? [2 
Nt, 0 12. A. The uſe of Syllables is to make Words. 
6,0, C How many Syllables go to make a Mord? | 
„ z. 4. I. Sometimes one Syllable makes a Word; as, man, at, cans 
ni Mien}, death, wiſe, fool, celf, burſe, aſi 
ll. Sometimes 70 Syllables go to make a Word; as, w9-man, fother, 
mar, ber, na er, ſo-ber, wiſ-dom, plen-ty. 
lic, WF III. Sometimes ee Syllables are in one Word; as, gra-ci-ous, god: li- 
| b bs, pi-e-ty, ſo-ber-neſs, un-wor-thy. 
ul Some Words are made of four Syllables; as, ſo-bri-e-ty, cor- -rec-ti 
Vong eace- a- ble-neſ, cha- ri ta-ble, un- mer-ci ful. | 
: Cy Some Words conſiſt of five Syllables; as, ex-com-mu-ni-cate, par- 
Fa- la- Iy, ma: gi. ſte- ri. al. 
IV. Sometimes fix Syllables go to make a Word; as, puri . f. ca an, 
V Hi. f. ca-ti on, ju: ſti. -fi-ca- ti- n, &c. 
© Q. In each of theſe Wards following tell me how many Syllables are 1 : 
Food Children will perpetually hearken to the Inſtructions of their Parents, 
a be obedient ta the Commands of their Malters. | 
CHAT Mc 
Va Eight Parts of Speech; or, of the eight fire of 
Words which Men uſe in ſpeaking. 
1, 0,0 | VG T arg Words uſed for ? 
lable;a A. Men uſe Words to expreſs and declare the Thoughts 
(their mind Ween they ſpeak : For we often need to ſignify our Thoughts 
others, and they cannot know our Thoughts but by our Speech. | 
pbthon . bat then is our Speech made up of ? | 
P;. 4. When we ſpeak to expreſs our Thoughts, our Speech i 1s made 
| of Words, and therefore Words are called Parts of Speech. | 
IL. uur Speech how many parts are there? 
a8 b. 4. In Speech be theſe eight Parts following. 
aud We I. A Noun. 5. An Adverb. 
rus 2. A Pranoun. 6. 4 Conjunction. 
Fanz 3. AM Verb. 7. A Prepoſi tion. 
4. A Participle. 8. An Interjection. 
ring. lu bat mean you when you ſay there are eight Parts of Speech? 
7. 4. I mean that there are eight forts of Words, which Men ule, when 
ript, fr j ſpeak ; for ſome Words are Nouns, ſome are Pronouns, ſome are Verbs, 
ers are Participles, others are Adverbs, other Words are Conjun8ians . 
i: Al rs P 22 tions, and others are Inter jections. 
o learn. 


Are there na other ſorts of Words uſed in ſpeaking e 
B 


HA 


18. A. 
| 


e ER . 


. - — 
— wb Ava &. fg 
Li - ww ny 1” — 
* 7: „ 8 


Ps ts K = > — — 
2 — N PPT” Iver” 4 ay ” 4 £00 3. I « N 
« - ud 
_ . - * : — 2 — 2 2 py = . a 
9 T . — 0 2 „ : * Ws - ” — > —— ei; . 9 - . w. _— * N , * 
* — * * TE n n 5. HEARTY _—O—— — Ed * = A — —— Fvg 8 p 74 * Nr BF ER . ky * 
— ? 2 > : 3 — 8 — — 3 K „ — - & - = 2 rf A * uw f 2 — "=== 4 R > % ». 1 $08 . _ neren EE 4 _ 5 ” 
* A n, — T La 90 5 ry — a — P * hag EIS * . ty = — 08 Y I © 3 2 4 2 _ = — — — — V 1 2 7 Wy 2 — 4 con 2 — 4 - - 
— by * RI — 6 8 4 - . , m4 * — A 7 * — kw = - 7 1 * : Px; _ = Z 3 _- 
7 „ 4/6 A Oe A © 4 te n : 5 8 * , 1 ” 10 — A fn es, ther *» I% ” - wm i 4 — A 8 K. 1 — RA pes d — 4 2 3 . N & 
I Jn Ce 2 . cope AL — — e — N 3,4 1 — p Sth. es P * . 7 1 to : + » " — e RO > wy e 28 — . 1 _ - . . * TP — * 
—— 5 EY IC 7 ” ws * 4 0 4 \ # . „ 92 — * 8 — * — ns, os Fonts 5 : Ex 4 . — 05 4 — 
rr 4 > _ * — — 5 w/ dl l | - n 4 *44 — * W . . 1 7 1 . Wu W m * — 2 
7 v 1 *% _ * , 1 Je a” +. 4 K. — — wa $4. 4d 22 * of 2 > . * ** 4 G5 4 i 7 : 
8 a — * 


s oh 2 1 
* — 
— — 3 2 
—— Ex 


«+ . 2 * 
—— * * * 2 
K 


5 — 


Moy EI 
es FI. ge. * a 
FEED * — 
1 2 = 2 
2 * — 
r 
1 {A Yo 


10 Ok a Noun; | Chap, 3 


18. 2. There are no other kind of Words uſed ; for every Word whit 
' Men uſe in ſpeaking is either a Mun, or a Pronoun, or a Verb, or a 5 
F ciple, or an Adverb, or a Conjunction, or a Prepaſition, or elſe an Interiefin 
x: Q. Do you not deſire to know which Wards are Nouns, and which jr; bn 
[| nouns, and which Verbs, e. | x 
A. Yes, Sir, I would gladly know, if you pleaſe to teach me. 


CHAT * 
Of a Noun. 


What Wiras then are Nouns ? | 
20. A. All thoſe Words are Nouns, that are the Names of things 
3 Q. How many kinds of Nouns are there ? 
Þ 21. A. There are two ſorts of Nouns; for of Nouns ſome be Sujju 
1 tives, and {ome be Adjectives. 
Q. What is a Noun Subſtantive? | 
22. A. A Noun Subſtantive is that Name of a thing, that can ſtand wil 
itſelf in a ſaying, and requireth not an Adjective to be joined to it to ni ”” 
ſenſe; as a Man, Homo; a Maſter, Magiſter ; a Parent, Parens. “ 
Q. How can you make it appear that theſe are Subſtantives ? 1 
23. A. Becauſe if one ſay, 7 ſee a Man, or I ſee the Maſter, or Ii! 
Parent; in each ſay ing, the ſenſe is plain and full, and I underſtandi 
meaning without an Adjective added to it. 7 
Q. What is a Noun Adjective! * 
24. A. A Noun Atjcfive is that Name of a thing, that cannot fan: 
elf in a ſaying, but requireth a Sub/Zantive, to which it may be joy 
to make ſenſe; as, god, bonus; happy, felix; white, albus. | 
Q. Make it clear, that theſe and ſuch like Words cannot ſtand alan it 
Saying. 2 
7 1 A. If any one ſay, T /ze a good, or I ſee an happy, or T ſee a whit a ates 
in theſe Sayinge there is no good ſenſe, nor do we underſtand the mein 
of them, but there needs to be put in a Sub/lantive to each Adjcclil. 
make ſenſe; as, I ſcc a god Boy, I ſee a happy Man, I ſee a white H 
Q. In theje Sayings following tell me which Nouns are Subſtantives 
which are Adjectives, and the reaſon why. 
The Mafter ſent a Letter The Ape eats Holes That is a mad 
The Boy writes a g The Man builds an Houſe This is a ſober 
A teiſe learns his Book We love ſtoeet Horſes drink " 


[| V HAT is a Noun 3 5 i 
| J 19. A. A Mun is the Name of a thing, that may be tu 0 
if felt, heard, or underſtood; as, | 2 
[| | The Name of this“ An Hand and in the La-C Miniis 3 
1 thing which here you An Houſe Stin Tongue the? Domiis . 
4} lee, in Engliſb is (A Man. JName of it is 9 Homo „ 
1 : ** / is called in 24, and in Bond bor 
| So this Boy Enoli Bad "ale Milus 3 
| Paper 1 Light, > Levis. E” 


5 
r 
a. f , 4 
: — — —— ne — — — fry — ——— —U—u———— ——ꝓ "Y 0 —— rs re 
> — y ** 
a — — — —ůͤů— m — rn —— 4 1 a „ 


© MWchap. V. Pouns Subſtanfives, 11 
which A „* n= ae; ; — — — — - 8 
2 
| g 1. A VOCABULARY. | 


8 


to Children. 


'Y 
-* — 


; 26, Every 

P Res &i f. 

bath its ame nömèn inis n. 
be Ka or Vg ſigni x i n, 


27. A Thing is 
Dezs i m. 
mund 1 m. 
pars tis f. 
membraum i n. 


| 
$ 
ö 


5. 

he World 

bor a part of it 
bor member 


| 25. Beſides which there is 


ings, 3 - 
ns HII ien. 


Vn 


29. Things in the World are 


w ſirit 
p Vody 


wing live 
becture. 


aba 


_ ſpirit4s ũs m. 
cor pas Oris n. 


8 animal alis n. 


| ſtand lr 
t to mii 


. 


bo. All which things have 


r Til 
(i their 
W cauſa æ f. 
Vture natura æ f. 
t ſtand Er: une fortũna æ f. 
be jolt 2 finzs is d. 


alone i J.. The nature of things i 18 
in their 

L a whi Le materie 2 f. 

e meu forma æ f. 

oa” 2 modzs i m. 

„ e gtn#s Eris n. 

Iduves, : , | 
32. To all things belong 

N 4 tempzs Oris n. 

- 2 ee locas i m. 

_ ſpatizm 1 n. 


bo: Exemples of Nouns Subſtantive, moſtly Priebe 
| N.B. Here follow the Exgliſp and Latin Names of things moſt familia 


order 


| 
ordo inis m. 
and number 


NUMETr#s 1 m. 


| 
| 


33. Time 1s 


en hour hora æ f. 
4 day dis Et d. 
a month mens7s is m. 
a year annzs im 
au age SCciilum i n. 


| 


34. In a day is 
the daton 
the morning 
the evening 
the night 


aurora æ f. 
mane n.“ 
veſper is m. 
nox ctis f. 


35. The day after this 1s 


#0 70rrow 


| 


Cas n. 


36. In a year are 


the ſpring VEr is n. 

the ſummer eſtas tis f, 
autumn autumnzZs i m. 
the winter hiems is f. 


| Of Spirits. 


N 


3397. A Spirit is 


an angel ingelzs i m. 
a mind mens tis f. 
or animes i n. 

4 ſoul anima æ f. 

| devil diabolzs i m. 
Of Bodies. 

38. The greater Bodies are 
| Heaven Cœli n i n. 
B 2 | the 


Of Water. 
44. Water 1s 
a arop gutta æ f. 
a dero ros ris m. 
a ſpring fons tis m. 
a river IVA i m. 
| or amnzs is m. 
a lake laczs us m. 
7 ja mare is n. 


12 Nouns Subſfanfive. Chap, y 
the ie ethzr Eris m. the ocean ; octinus i m. 
the air Aer Eris m. ja wave unda æ f. 
the earth tellzs aris f. | | 
the water aqua æ f. 45. Frozen Water 15 
| 5 : ice lacizs & f. 
39. Bodies in the Skie are ſnow 2 = f 
the ſun sl is m. bail grand inis f. 
the moon luna æ f. . 
a far ſtella æ f. 46. Of Mater is made 
: la Bubble bulla æ f. 
40. From which come |, Han ſpams æ f. 
a beam Jubar is n. a /inozwer imber ris m. 
a light mr cis f. - | 
a fire ignis is m. 5 
a flame flamma & f. Of Earth. 
41. When light is with-held 47. Catth is 
| there 1s made land _ terra æ f. 
92 . ground humZs 1 . 
darkneſs tencbrzarum pl. f. firm ground SOTO, 
. or fundds i n. 
42. By Fire are made |? pulvis _ 
5 or pulver is n. WW 
2 firebrand torris is m. dj 
a live coal prũna x f. . ; ; | 
SOT | E Earth mixt wich War 0 
aſtes Cinzs Eris : 15 | 
FE EM c IM. dir. cœn¹ in. 75 
| | mud Jimas im. 175 
43. In the Air is clay mitm in. 2 
a team vapdr oris m. = 
a ſmoke famzs i m. 49. Land by the Water li 
a cloud nubes is f. i - - 
a wind venta, i m. a brink margs inis d. 
a thunderbelt fulmen inis n. a bank +” — 


Iitus Gris n. 


2 ſhore 
50. Upon the Earth's 


4 plain field campus i m. 
a vale or valley vallis is f. i 
a hill collis is m. 


a mountain mons tis m. 


51. Bodies growing oft 
Carth are 


minera = f. Vear 


a mineral 


a plant Planta & f. 


| 
| 
» | 


is m. 8 1/4! 
vel 
ad. ſtone 


cryſtallus i f. 
gemma æ f. 
magnẽ tis. m. 


55. A Jewel 1s 


n. Wimnd adamas ntis m. 
5 ſapphire ſapphirys 1 K 


1 rubinzs 1 m. 


Of Plants. 


56. A Plant is 
herb æ f. 


frutex leis m. 
arbor is f. 


57. An herb is 
graãmè x Inis n. 
Papaver -is n. 
linum i n. 


frux gis f. 
38. Cozn is 


bean faba æ f. 
60 pĩiſum i n. 


——— 


2 os d , 
a wa Px : 
p | 90 * as 4 © * 3 '* 
A 99-540 - - Y p 7 U — 
5 . 209 — 2 5 
93 ä . 5 * 0 — '% : . N a ? - 
1%. i 4 "© gn 0 5 N - — 3 — 4 8 > : 
25 — 7 —7 1 2 * — ” 8 ba 26%. 2 phe \ —_ 2 , = yr; "_ 
WS. . — e — — 2 Yy * 
. 1 a , y ww. 
n — — _ — 0 - pe wes 5 r 1 Tay «+ " — n — . 
Rs 2 — 1 mk 2 2 [2 Il wn” — „ 
Ln,” " © — 0 - * — hy l 4 þ 
+4 & 1 * C - G BAG, N my Z 
_— "I A 5 . . l 
n OS r N wk 4 « \ - = 
bil ae: oe. es D L - 


18 
ES. 2 
<> — D 
. Bee: 
— As 2 


2 — 
Rr — 


ry 3 
<7 


” p 
COTE 2 


5 R TE 
. * 
La "> ; 72 


p. V. Chap. V. Pouns Hubſtantive. 3 
3 | oat avẽna æ f. 
Of Minerals. wheat ador «is n. 
is i 52. KA 3 = 59. Df Con 
. 1 E 2 "RA n. a handing crop is SEgEs tis f. 
Tim n 
f a metal mctallum i n. 60. In Co2n 18 
: a fone läpis 1dis m. 2 
40 | 2 alk caulis 1s m. 
ace WE the ear ſpica æ f. 
4 53: Pekals _ the grain granum i n. 
c 2 plumbam i n. | 
m. WW ferram 1 n. Ef | 
uber F ris n. Of Shrubs. | 
er argéntam i n. 5 
2210 auram 1 n. 61. AD h2ub 1 
: | a cane canna & f. 
54. A Stone 18 a reed calamys i m. 
| 2 arena æ f. eat arunds Inis f. 
„ ne faxoni n. ny 
__ silex icis d. W e 
i m. nice pumex icis d. - 
marble marmyzr is n. Of Trees. 


an apple- tree 
a pear-tree 

a cherry-tree 
a fig-tree 

a bay-tree 

a box-ree 

a cedar 

an oa 

a willow 


a wood 


a foreſt 


a grove 


the root 
the flump 
the branch 
or Hough 
the wood 


3 


62. A Tree is 


63. Trees growing together 
make | 


64. The parts of Plants 


* <a 2 
Or Tara ogg, oo) " 
— =o r — — = * A 2 — © SF. 


hats dnp 4 a 
— * 
per} 8 * 
N lv * * 
— = . * 
5 2 a wy — 
* 5 2 — 4 - 2 
— — 


malys i f. 
Pyras i f. 
ceriſus i f. 

ficus ũs f. 
laurgs os or i f. 
buxas i f. 
cẽdras i f. 
quercas us f. 
sällx cis f. 


* N W 
Ge — * 
ws w - 


edn. $a — 


— 
— „„ 


4 = 
NY 


— 
WY 4 


26, 


— 
o err 


ji 
1 

1.38 
- x4] 

722 
45 
4 
Hs 
17 
be. 

— 3 
4 
T1228 
1 I 


| 
ſilva æ f. 
nẽmus öris n. 
lacs 1 m. 


arc | 


radix cis f. 
ſtirps is f. 


rãmus 1 m. 


lignam i n. | 


14 Nouns Subſkfantive. 


Chap, y 


65. In a Bough are 
4 freſh leaf frons dis f. 
a dead leaf follum i n. 
a bloſſom or flower fios ris m. 
the fruit fructas us m. 


Of Fruits. 
66. Frnit are 


a tucumber cucumer - is m. 
a melon melo nis m. 
a pome põmam i n. 
a nut nux cis f. 
a berry bacca æ f. 
67. A Pome is 
an apple mãlum i n. 
a pear pyram i n. 
a cherry ceralum i n. 
a plum prũnum i n. 


4 fig 


ficus us or 1 f. 


68. A Berry is 


an olive oliva æ f. 
a firawberry fragam i n. 
4 grape ũva æ f. 


69. Plants ariſe from 


se men inis n. 


feed 


Of live Creatures. 


70. An Animal is 


an in ſect inſẽctam 1 n. 
a WIrm vermzs is m. 
a ſerpent ſerpens tis d. 
a fis piſcis is m. 
a bird avis is f. 

a beaſt beſtia æ f. 

a man hömo Inis c. 

71. In all which there is 

22 vita æ f. 
fenſe ſenſus us m. 
fex ſexs ũs m. 


72. Things perceived by 
| ſlenſe are 
found ſõnus i m. 
or voice vox cis f. 
_ color | 
,ta/ie or reli aps 3 
me!l "_ dde⸗ Oris m. 


pain or grief dolor 


73. By its Ser an Animal I 
5 


18 
2 male mas Aris m. 
or a female ſeming æ f. 
74. A Female brings fort 
2 young one pullzs 1 m, 
or elle an egg vum in. 5 
| ——ů— — © 
Of Inſects. 
— © 4 
| 75. An Inſed is 5 
a houſe pediciilys i n. 4 
a flea Pulex Icis d. | 
a fiie muſca æ f. 
4 bee apis is f. 29 
a waſp veſpa æ f. 2 4 
a locuft locuſts æ f. 47 
Of Serpents. % 
. 4 95 
76. A Serpent is MW, 
a ſnake angus is d. 1 
4 dragon draco õnis m. 
a viper or adder vipera æ f. | 
= —— 3 
| Of Fiſhes. 3 t 
77. Kiver-Fithes ar We 
a tench tinca æ f. ö 
a perch perca æ f. 8 
a trout trutta æ f. is 4 


I a ſalmon 


ſabno önis m. BB wy 


78. Ha 


| Chap. V9 __ Nouns Stibſfantive. | ith 


. . n ESP | 


— 3 . vitüla- i m. 
» 8. Sea-fithes are | beep sv in C | 
I 4 whale balzna = £ a lamb agnzs 1 m, 
© a doiphint delphin is m. a ſevi ne | ſus üis c. | 
an herring halec is f. n. a hog porc#s i m. 
2 sölea æ f. a goat cäpèr ri m. 
4 cher öſtrèa æ f. | 
bn. — ä — 85. A Company of theſe is 
4 = Birds or Fowls. a flock greEx gis m. 
mal 79. Birds are 86. Wozking-Cattle are 
© 4 ſparrow paler js m. | bullock bas Gvis c. 
| a jeoallow hirundo inis fo | ,, horſe Equas i m. 
a pigeon columburi m. an aſs asIngs i m. 
a ſertridge perdix cis d. | ule mũlas i m. 
eben corV#5 1 m. a camel camelys i m. 8 
fort | pheaſant phallany; i m. an elephant Elephas ntis m. Þ 
a turtle _ turtury-1s m. 1 
an eagle aquila æ f. 1 
a aol bubo onis m. 87. Wild-beaffs are 0 
14 a fag cervus 1 m. 1 
| 80. Tame Fowls are a buck or doe dama æ d. = 
a cick eallys i m | hare  lepzxs oris m. 7 
5 a ben gallinz æ f. a mote talpa æ d. 5 
im. capon capo önis m. a frog rang æ f. | 1 
d. E | 5 
„ 87. Watfer-fowls are | 88. Ravenous-beafts are b 
. gooſe anſer is m. a lion le, önis m. N 
. a duck anas tis f. a bear urſzs i m. if 
f. 1 wan olor -oris m. a zoolf lipas i m. 0 a 
v2. To Birds belong“ . 0 
be frather pluma æ f. | as {| 
; % quill penna æ f. 89 Beaſts ha ce [ 
3 bo ing alam . ſome an horn corny u n. H 
F BOD . —ſome a ſnout roſtram i n. 1 
* | Of Beats ſome a tail cauda æ " i 
83. Beaſts about the houſe] 90. Dn Bcaffs Is either 6 
= , are hair or ſhag pilzs 1 m. F 
- 3 or zo90l lana æ f. 7 
: 8 kn C. or briſtle SEA æ f. i} 
are cat felis is m. . 
, « mouſe mas ris m. Pair 1 q 1 
f. | 84. Cattle Peczs dis f. a mane | Juba x f. q 
f. 4 bu{] taũras i m. a lock coma æ f. 
F479 vaccs æ f. a beard barba æ f. _ 
| — 


the forehead frons tis f. 
the eye oculys i m. 
the noſe nãſas i m. 
the mouth 54 ris n. 

the chin mentzm 1 n. 


tbe lip 


the roof 
the inner cheek 


16 Pouns Subſfantive, 


Chap. y 


— 9 | 
The Parts of the Body, 99- In the * of the i 
eſpecially of Man's. _ - - "—_— | 
; the fore-part 8 | 
92. The Parts of the Body e Sack-pare tergum i n. | 
are the ide latys Eris n. 4 
the head Capt itis n. 3 
the trunk trunczs i m. 4 
a limb artas Us m. ö 5 


93. In the Head are 


the crown vertex icis m. 
tbe hair crinis is m. 

| or capillys i m. 
the tar aurzs is f. 
the face facies i f. 


94. In the Fate are 


tbe countenance wvaltzs us m. 


95. In the Epe is 


a tear lacryma æ f. 


96. To the Mouth belong 
Jablum i n. 

or labrum i n. 
the outer cheek gena f. 


97. Within the Month are 
palituz ien. 
bucca æ f. 


the tongue lingua æ f. 


the gum gingiva æ f. 
the chap faux cis f. 


rhe throat guttür - is n. 


98. Between the Head and 
Trunk are 
collam i n. 
Jugulam 1 n. 


the neck 
the throttle 


100. In the fo2e-part are 


the breaſt pectzs oris n. 
the belly venter ris m. 7 
| ihe dug mamma x f. 


101. In the back-part ate Þ. 
tbe ſhoulder  humergsi m. 
the mid-back dorſum i n. 
the buttotk nates is f. 


102. The Limbs are 


the hand manzs us f. bl 
the foot 2 | 
the leg pes Edis m. 


103. Parts of the Hand ar 


the arm brãchiam i n. 
the fiſt pugnss i m. : 
the palm palma æ f. 2 
the thumb pollex icis m. ¶ Vi 
a finger digit#s i m. . 


dents 


104. Parts of the Foot ar 


the thigh femyy oris n. 

the knee genuu n, 8 
the leg Crus ris n. ö 
the heel calx cis d. 

105. In all which parts ar 
in Clitzs is f. II 
fle/b caro nis f. | 

a bone os ths n. 7 
bamour humgr oris m. Ig 
a VEIN vena f. | 


106. The Inwards ar: 
the brain cercbrumi n #7 
the heart cor dis n. 

the lungs or lights pũlmo onis m. 


the liver JecZr oris n. 
the ſpleen iplen -is m. 
the paunch alvas i f. 


tbe rein or Ridney ren -1s m. 


the crag ee vix cis f. 


the bladder veslca æ f. 


(Chap. V. Nouns Subſtantive, 2 
I The Bones. a diſeaſe morbus i m. 

; | death. mor tis q 

| 107. The Bones are 

he chull cranizm 1 n. 112. Diſeaſes are 


a coug b tuſl7s is f. 
an ague or fever febris is f. 


the aropfie hydrops 7 ; 


113. While Animals are free 
from Diſeaſes they "”" in 


health, welfare sälũs tis 
firength  rob#r n. 


bl 


| 


114. For their maintenance 
there is | 


provifion or plenty copia æ f. 
food or meat cib#s i m. 


drink potzs us m. 
| 
of Man, his age, and kin- 
dred. | 
115, Man by his age 18 
a boy or lad puer 1 7 
a girl or laſs uelle K 
a virgin virgo inis f. 
a grown man vir -i m. 
a grown woman mülièr is f. 
an old woman anzs as f. 


116. A Man by ba kindzed 


18 


. 
— = 6 22 — — — . N — 7 : 2 76 ö 
"x at es Lent a * . * 1 4 . 0 ” c : % "FO an n Ld => 
— 4 '% 2 n 5 Br. . > 37 * —— — : — — C - I . : "ey 9 — 4 
— + 7 . R bs —— ——ů— 1 . 2 r n „ 2 ous * 5 . — ia 
— « : OY OD —— — a — 3 2 8 > . 
1 A — : 2 — TO Ds oe 2 N 
— IE < > * e. 1 WP ; _—_ — « ht 5 — pt Wa Pa. „ > © 7 - SI 
Nr e r woo, ooo * , ww AEDT | 5 3 * 
Y AY mn 2 WED . 8 — be Cn. — —— x os — wy aud _ - 7 p N 3 8 * 4 of ! by > "7 #1 
os * k G _ 5 4 5 \ £ 3 1 5 5 ka | _ 
* . 8 222 r Dre AN LCD l = _ = 


d oy mt 
„K. . OE VOY, 
- =. a % "35 „ 2 * * MP. 


/e cheek-bone mala æ f. 

are 4 90th dens tis m. 
1, F rib coſta æ f. 
n the ſhin bone tibia æ f. 
f a nail or claw unguis is m. 
are i "_ 
n. The Humours. 
08. Humours in the Body 
re my. 
| lend ſanguis nis m. 
' ni lac tis n. 
; 8000 {el lis n. 
dar: W109. Excrements to be caſt 
* forth of the Body are 
= Marat | sũdòr oris m. 
m. le Saliva æ f. 
n. natter Pus ris n. 

rine ürina x f. 
of att * ſtercas öris n. 
n. | 

b the Affections and Diſ- 

b eaſes. 
ts a 8 

110. Animals are affected 
1 | with 

fre | desidèr lam 1 n. 
13 m. Nunger fames is f. 

1, S1tzs is f. 
s are e amor Oris m. 
i n. {re odium 1 N. 
1 ger ira æ f. 
is m i” gaudiym 1 N. 
s n. [Dt ſpẽ &i f. 
_ ear timòr oris m. 
| Ir dread metzs us m. 
n. . 
f. Pi. And they are ſubject to 


wound 


vulngs Eris n. 


a giant 


a father pater < ” 
a mother mater ris f : 
a ſon fills i m. 

a daughter filla æ f. 

à brother frater ris m. 
a fifier SOror öris f. 
a grand. father iviis i m. 

a grana=child nCpos tis m. 
a father" in-law SOCEr 1 m. 
a ſon-in-iaw gEner | f m. 


117. A Man too big is 


g1gas ntis m. 


j 
f 


F 
| 
| 
| 


— - 


* 
— 2 5 b - 
— 8 Cera” ry OR, ene Ae} n 
— 9 — - BETS. 


5 — by az 


S OO: Rt i SE A 


aw ——_ 


N ” p 
a Ow pu 4 P 4 r " 
wane SAGE — * 
A 
. 


Nouns Subſtantive. 


Chap, y, 


A Man too little is 
a dwarf pum1li, onis m. 


Proper Names. 


118. Proper Names of 
Men are 


Adam Adimas 1 m. 
Abraham Abrahimas 1 m. 
Anthony Antonius i m. 
Benjamin Benjamini i m. 
Charles Carolys i m. 
Chriſtopher  Chriſtophoras i m. 
Daniel Daniel -1s m. 
David David -is m. 
Edward Edvardys 1 m. 
Francis Franciſcys i m. 
George Geörg 1s 1 m. 
Henry Henricas i m. 
Janes Jacobus i m. 
John Joannes is m. 
Luke Lncas æ m. 
Mark Marcys i m. 
Matthew Mattheys i m. 
Paul Paulys i m. 
Peter Petrys i m. 
Richard Richards 1 m. 
Robert Robertys i m. 
Samuel Samuel -is m. 
Thomas Thomas æ m. 
William Guliélmæ, i m. 


119. Proper Names of 


Women are 

Ann Anna x f. 
Barbara Barbara æ f. 
Catharine Catharina æ f. 
Dorothy Dorothea æ f. 
Elizabeth Elizabẽthz æ C. 
or Betty or Eliza æ f. 

Eva æ f. 

Hannâ æ f. 

Jana æ f. 


Joanna æ f. 
Martha æ f. 
Maria æ f. 


120. hat theſe Creature 
may act they have 
a power or force vis is f. 
help or means Ops is f. 
aid auxillum i n. 
121. The uſual manner of 
acting is 
cuſtom or manner mos ris m. 
And the thing done by ther 
18 
öpils Eris n. 


Rebecca Rebecca * . | | 
Sarah Sara æ f. | 
Suſan Sulanna f. | 

- — — ö [ 

Acts of the Creatures, b 

; 


a work 


Acts of Men. 
122, Every Man hath hi 
buſineſs 


charge 
auty or office 


negotium i n. 
mun”s Eris n. 
off iciam 1 n. 


123. Man's duty lies n 


labour labor oris m. 
virtue virtys tis f. 2 
faithfulneſs. fidzs &i f. beit 
124. He ſhould do all vi 
counſel consilian i n. 13 
art or ill ars tis f. | 
care cura æ f. 5 
Audy ſtudiam i n. % 
without delay morax f. . 


125. That they may do 1 
work, there is p2opoſ 8 


to them | | 
a law lex gis f 3. 
an example exemplin | u. 
ja reward præmium in. 
a puniſhment pena æ f. 


126, 


(Chap V. 


Nouns am "= 


1126 The Law commands to 
allow / to every thing its 


f g . 

Eight or due Jus ris n. 
ol 12 or price prètium i n. 
©, nur honor oris m. 
atures ö 127. Rewards are 
e Wh laus dis f. 

4 r gloria . 

40 lücram in. 
i n, Nee mercẽ dis f. 
net u * 

128. Punichments are 
m. ride verber -1s n. 
y the With or killing nèx cis f. 

| 129, In work ill done 
s n. there is 

Uni mendy7 1 n. 


%a or blot macula æ f. 
| faultineſs or vice vitlam i n. 


ath hs 

..: 30. A vitious act Is 

tris . % can 

i n. Noine crimes Inis n. 
les u illany {celzs Eris n. 
1e5 

is n. 131. A crime is 

is f. waneſs luxus tis m. 

1 leit or a cheat dolys i m. 

all w A fraus dis f. 

* 132. Perſons guilty of 

* crimes are 

min wal far · is m. 

3 Put throat latre önis m. 
: 2 alutterer adültér -1 m. 

1 

\opoſt 8 . 

; | The works of Men. 

is f.. For paſſage they make 

plum i Wy via æ f. 

me ath calls is m. 

q 5 6 l lige Pons tis m. 
126, 


C 


ale or beer 


6 — on, 1 — rr — m — — 


| 2 boat cymba = 0 
a ſpip navzs is . 
134. For lighting they 
| make 
a torch fax cis f. 
a lamp lampas dis f. 
a candle candel⸗ x f. 


135. Of Land they make 


a court or plat Area = f. 
a field ager ri m. 
a garden hortzs i þ m. 


136. Of Petals they make 


money nummys i im. 
or pecunia æ f. 

a drinting cup põcũlum i n. 

a kettle lebEs " m. 


137. Of Flax or Wool is 


made 
a thred filam i n. 
a line linea & f. 
a rope ſuns is m. 
a ſack ſaccas i m. 
a ſail or veil Vvẽlum i n. 
cloth pannys 1 m. 
138, Of Wood they make 
a ſtaff {cip10 « onis m. 


a board or plank table! * . 


139. For cating 


the cook coquai i m. 
makes bread pants is m. 
butter bũtyrzm i n. 
cheeſe cãs Asi m. 


a Oy or feaſt Epulurs 1 n, 


140. For deinking they 
make 


broth or pottage 


0 
rr 


ins ris. n. 
5 cereviſia x f. 
wine vinum i N. 


2 1 Eat- 


| 
ö 
| 


4 1 
— — . ¾ͤ—— p SS 7§,%«ð⏑ðP' ũß＋r e In yo N 
n * 8 1 — 2 — — 3 
_ Y #4 my ns 


92 2 2 — 
4 44 oo 
2 
* 4 Pos. 1 1 i 


e 
——_ OS 0 
P p aſl 4 * pager 
n 


r 
ws — 


* 
by 
1 
I's 
- 
4 
1 


7 
7 q 
2 
„„ 
1 #) 
* 
* 
4 n 
IS 
' 

. a 
: Sg 
0 
1 
, 

7 
2 
3 > Ti 
5 0 
uf 
- . 
: = 
£ 
4 bt * 
2 4 
| 4 
F 
» P 
* + 
8 
4 
* 
1 
'B 
2 


— — uwb—b—õ— — 
— — as 
_- 


— 
3 
5 - ite 


— —̃ 


LY Ie” 3 * * 
„ka:iwdů r 
pa * — 4 


r aA RX 
D » 2 
MX. . 


make 
an hat galerys 1 m. 
a peruke caliendrym 1 n. 
a garment veſtis is f. 


a wheel rota æ f. 
146. For the beaſts are 

a yoke jügam in. 

a ſadd!z ſelia æ f. 

a bridle frœnam i n. 

Arms. 
147. Arms are 

a weapon tẽlum 1 n. 

a bow arcys us m. 
an arrow ſagitta æ f. 

a gun ſclõpas i m. 
3 ens;s is m. 
4 feoord 27 gladizs i m. 


—— 


20 Nouns Subſtantive. 


= er ee w ————³EPũ — — — — 


Chap. v. Nc 


— 


141. Eating a meal iS 


a breakfaſt jenticulz77 1 n. 
a dinner prandlam 1 n. 
a common ſupper cena æ f. 


142. For cloathing they 


143. A garment 1s 
a choſe coat tunica æ f. 
a cloak palliyzm i n. 
a gown toga æ f. 


144. An Handp⸗crafts⸗man 


a ſmi th 
namely & 4 wright >tavber 11 m. 


a maſon 


makes a chariot Curry us m. 

ar ns arma orum pd. n. 
a vefje! vas ſis n. ä 

a building =des is fc -- 


ſupeilex ctllis f. 
inſtrüm ent ien. 


Bou ſpol d- ſta f 
an inſirument 
145. To a Chariof belong 
a pole temo önis m. 

an axel. tree axis is m. 


Buildings. 15 
148. Buildings are 
a cote or cottage cala æ f. © the 
an houie dowgds ũs i f. TT, 
a palace palatlum ien. © or « 
a fort or caſile aræ cis f. ab 
4 tower turrzs is f. ; 


149. A building raiſed fr} E 
wozſhip is | 


an altar altare 15 n. 1 4 
a temple 1 4 f 
or church ( mo 11 
150. In a building is W'-* 
the wall _ Partes Etis m. “ 
the cellar cella æ f. 1 
the kitchin cuUlina æ f. 10 ; 
the ball aula æ f. * 
the chamber cimerazf, MW'* 
WH 
151. To an Youſe belog 4 
a gate Janus æ f. = 
a door oſt Im i n. 3 | 
a wind fenẽſtra æ f. 5 
152. To a Gate belong „ , 
a poſt poſt;s is m. Wy 
a hinge cardo Inis d. © Ne 
: than e 
153. Out⸗houles arc , 

a table ſtabülym in. 
a privy  foricaz f. = 

a barn horreum i n. 
a mill | mo0ia æ f. | * 
154. A company of hoe . 
| = 0 7, 

are - 
3 pag 
a ſireet or row vicus 1 m. op 
a town õppidum i n. ! 
or city $. or urbs is f. mT 


155. To a Town beloiy 


42 gate or port porta æ f. 1 
a wall mura i m. | 
4 publick-meet-Q wo. i n. TW 
ing place 8 | TH 
150. Hol 1 


Nouns Subſtantive. 


4 
| 
{ 


„„ 
2 


V (Chap: V. 
F F Houſe and Land out of el 
= Town is 


the country Tus ris n. 
. arm 8 villa æ f. 


a bat or flick 


biculas i m. 


161, Tools of Huſbandzy 
| are | 


an harrow or rake raſtrum i n. 


oer age a fark nc! 
== te a book falæ cis f. 
Houſholdiſtuff. 4e ligo onis m. 


| for N 157. Houſhold⸗ſtuff. 


162. Inſtruments ot catching 


are | 
a net r&te is n. 
an Hay net caſſis is m. 
a hook hãamz i m. 

| Recreation. 
163. When wozk is over 
there 1 Is 

leiſure tive 1 5 
quiet quies tis f. 
fleep lomnzs i m. 
play lüdas i m. 


DS 


Societies of Men. 

164. Men join together into 
a family familia æ f. 

4 corporation civitas tis f. 


a kiugdom regnum i n. 

a ſchool ſchola æ f. 

a church eccles! 14 æ f. 
165. In a Family are 

a hushand vir i m. 

a wife uxor oris f. 


be Lord or Mr. Dominns i m. 
the Lady or Dame Domina æ f. 


the maſter hEras i m. 

the miſtreſs hera æ f. 

a ſervitor miniſter ri m. 
a hand maid ancilla x t. 


166. In a Coꝛ pozation are 


a citizen C1vZs is c. 


} a jpit ver u n. 
i diſcas i m. 
a cat SEdes is f. 
chair ____ cithedra æ f. 
is „ table menſa æ f. 
er tapes tis m. 
aan A 
or towel ES 
a bed lectas i m. 
0 wu or trunk arca æ f. 
' We forceps 1pis d. 
long 1 bellows follis is m. 
F M Inſtruments by a 
| | Men work are 
on . 4 bie or coulter cuter ri m. 
1. a mallet or beetle mallèus i m. 
d. edle acas us f. 
ire e diſlaff colus i f. 
; | a key clayzs is f. 
ö 159. Inſtruments of Muſtck 
nu i are 
_ tympänum i n. 
house - Me | tibla æ f. 
a ubiſtle or ? gas 
Tl, 8 fiſtüla æ f. 
f : a trumpet tuba æ f. 
| i Tt harp lyra x f. 
' =- J. 1a fides is f. 
Os - 295 
65 1 Inſtruments of ſtriking 
m. are 
. 45 faſtis is m. 
us or wand virga æ f. 


a magiſtrate 


magiſtratzs is m. 


22 


Nouns Subffantive, 5 


— — nnn — u EE I te I EORIE — — 


— 


Chap y. 


a judge jJudex 1cis c. 


167. In a Kingdom is 


the King Rex gis m. 
the Queen Regina æ f. 
the People Populas i m. 


168. The King hath 


a throne thronas i m. 
a ſcepter ſceptram ien. 
a crown corona z f. 


169. The People are 


the nobles proceres um pl. m. 
the commonalty plebs is f. 
the rabble vulgas i m. & n. 
170. A company of People 

| = | 
a rout turba æ f. 
a tribe tribal us f. 

nãtio onis f. 

e 2 or gens tis f. 


171. In a School are 


the maſter migiſter i m. 
the ſcholar diſcipnlus i m. 


— 


L 


172. Rulers in the Churc 


are | 
Jeſus Jeſ7s u m. 
Chriſi Chriſta, i m. 
an Apoſtle Apoſtolus i m. 
a Biſhop Epiſcopas i m. 


a Priejt or Elder Presbyter -i m. 


a Deacon Diaconas i m. 
Of War. 
173. Betwixt Men there is 
peace pax cis f. 
or Arise Jis tis f. 
a fight pugna æ f. 
a war bellum i n. 


ta leader 


| 2 bool or globe globus i m. 


— 


174. To War are needy 


dir eis E. 


2 ſoldier milzs itis c, ju 
a guardian cuſtõ/ dis c. 5 
an enemy hoſt?s is c. E? 
an army Ib. 


exereltus ũs m. 


tte 
4000 
0 bibl, 


Ot computing. 
175. The thing computed; 
any whole eſtate, 

foot, pound 
half of an As 
ne twelfth part 
of it, an inch 
or ounce 


aſſis or as 


ſemiſſis 


6 uncia æ f. 


176. A heavy body is 
a burden on, Eris n. 
a weight pondys &ris n. 


n 


Of Figures. 
177. A round body 1; 


—— 


a ball 
an orb 


pila æ f. 
orb7s is m. 


— 


Of Signs. 

178. A ſign ol a thing 
an image 1mago inis f. 
an idol idõlam i n. 
179. A ſign of a thought! 


a ſpeech ſermo onis m. 


180. In a Speech are 


a letter 
a ſyllable 
4 word 


litera æ f. 
ſylläba æ f. 
verbam in. 


18 1. A Speech is 


a tale or fable fãbüla æ f. 


Chap. V. | Nouns Adjective. 0 * 2 23 


fame or talk fama æ f. 183. F or waiting thee is 
1 bifory hiſtoria æ f. pen 5 penn 3 
e joewi . ee 
Wa mA. | papyrzs i f. 
| prayer prex cis f. 1 ; or charta æ f. 
n {M652 A ſpeech wzit down is 184. Of Nouns Subſtantive 
er or epifile epiſtöla æ f. you have heard 
Th: liber ri m. enough sätis 1 
edu % biblia orum pl. n. Lor to much nimis ik 


g. 2. A VOCABULARY: 


Or, Exemples of Nouns Adjective. 


| F B. Here follow the moſt uſed Adjectives, which cannot Rand alone 
a Sentence, and therefore ſome of the SubNantives are here ſet down 
is and their Adjectives added to them. 


„ 2785 Qu. 188. As to its fate it is 
2 [a a thing is it Qualis is e. well, ſafe wo 4 
proſperous roſper -a um 
| A. The thing is — | folly cis 6. 3. 
is W talis is e wretched, miſerablemĩsr a um 
bid bonys a um whole totus a--um 
od malzs a um or torn | lacer-a um. 
Ne, handſome pulcher ra rum : | 
mderful miras a um 189. A thing compared to 
—= Purys a um another 1s 
or fitting aptys a um f ü 3 
22 grãtas a um diverſe, various varius a um 
. Wi: vi" «om like similis is e 
* mbleſome mole{zs a um. or unlike diſs1m1l;s is e 
. | | equal or even par © c. 3. 
6. As to its value a eu or odd impar $ © 
rht thing 18 190. As to its motions a 
5 dienen a um thing is 
m. Ws, Lig b-pri ed cãrus a um 
cb, low prized vilis is e gentle  lenzs is E--: 
ire | : flrong, ear neſt vehemens tis c. 3 
57. As to neatneſs a4 thing ſwift, quick celer is e 
f. 18 flow, tardy tardus a um. 
an | . F WP” 
N 191. As to its weight it is 
pũras a um heavy, grievous gravis is e 
fincerys a um. light levis! j e. 


192. As 


EP ; ; +4 clit 
199. A thing dedicated to | <ight> 4% or 4% ©, 


22 Kouns Adjcdive. Chap y 
— A 2 Chap. J, 


— Ci 

192. As to the time of its | 200. The ſign of a ching x 
continuance a thing is % verus 

| 5 8 or falſe falſus 2 

_— G1} NOY&s 2 um certain certus ali 

og Vetus C 3. or doubtful dublug Or 4 

eternal æternas a um. x 0 


5 ; | 201. A Spirit is er, 
193: As to It's ſeaſonablenels good, gracious plus 


It 18 or graceleſs impius Mer 
late, lag sẽrus a um | 202. A Bow is MR" 
5 F firmus ] 
or 4mripe immaturas a UM, /e un | ” 


. . I] Avus. 
194. As to its figure a thing RO: TOY 
* 203. Nature is = 
freight, right rectas a um fruitful abte c. z. I. | 
crooked curvas a um. or barred ſterilis. a 
| | 4 21 
195. To the Sight a thing | 204. The Ponths are 12, 5 
15 January Januir1ys T% 
: February Februirius - 
white albz; a um March Martius | 
ce _ April Aprilis is e 
red ruber ra rum May Maius 
grey-haired, hoary canus a um. Fane fankys 4 
| WR. ſaltus 
196. To the Taſte a thing is 2 Augüſtus 
froeet dulczs is e September September” ul 15 
bitter amarzs a um October October , 
| | November November 1 
197. To the Smell a thing | December December * 
* 8 205. A place is 
feoeet ſcented ſuãvis is e full plenus 112. 
tintiug tẽter ra rum or empty EE r 
3 bred 
198. To the Touch a body 206. As to its placing WM 
Is 8 thing is f bod 
plain plenzs a um right, on the right dexter -2 um e, / 
even æquus a um or /eft ſiniſter -a vl Fa 
ſmoothß lævis is e | ao The 


: Er | 4 
—— | «per -12 rom Air is clear, not cloudy 5 


Shade, dark or dull 

ed is — 5 ſiceus 
facred, holy ſacer ra rum A Stone, hard * 
others are profane profanus a um Silk, /eft 10 


Chap. V. - Nouns Adjective. 25 

208. An Rn is | or unpoliſbt, rude 70015 = 
I % vigil e. fooliſh ſtultus ; 
alive | W 21 A hi ' "ER 
or dead mortuus 5. As to his dilpolition 
ſcend, well SANUS : „ is 
Gor ct, faint Eger ra rum mild, meek mild 
. Pinguis or cruel, fierce ſævus 

? macer ra rum ſor barbarous - barbärus 
Wrutiſh: brutus chaſte, pure caſtus 
MM ferus or wanton laſcĩvus 
ſevere 8 


| 209. An Animal by its 


| power is 
nent, able Potis 
uro /g gnarus 
br ignorant Ignarus 
210, For want of ſome 
powers an Animal is 
Blind cæcus 
af ſurdus 
unb müũtus 
unt or Halt claudus 
bir, As to action an Anima] 
| 18 
ll or Sai hebeEs c 1 


rt, chearful Alacer ris re 
r ſw, backward piger ra rum 
art acer ris re 


br fuggiſh, lazy ſegnis 

12, After much action it 1s 
Peary feſſus 

red laſſus 

A body without a covering is 
ted, bare nudus 

213. A Sfomach is 
ungry, faſting Jejunus 

full, ſatisfied sätür - a um. 

214, A Man as to his un- 


derſtanding is 
ſe $4piens 


| 


216. As to his private mans 


ners he 1s 
holy ſanctus 
ober SObrius 
or drunken Ebr1us 


fortis 


out, valiant 


4 17. In his carriage to others 


| he 1s 

juſt juſtus 
or 4unjuj} injuſtus 

friendly amicus 
or unfriendly inimicus 

218. By his polTefſions 2 
Man is 
rich div&ö 23. 
| or poor pauper C 3. 


219. As to his ſtate he is 


free, freeman iber -a um 
or bond, enſlaved ſervus 


220. As to his age he is 
young jüvknis 
old, an old perſon SENEX & 


221. As to ſcciety a Man 1 18 


alone sölus 
or afſeciate. söcius 


222, A Man's countenance i 1 


| 


cheary, merry hilaris 
or /orrowfut meœſtus 
blith, kind 


| blandus 


Wy. - 
* 8 
2 
be!” pl 
TY 1 
* 
7 
4 
* 
1 1 
7 
1 
"I 1 
ji 
3 
£0 
9 
4 
i 
I 
it 
Te 
's 1 
4 
a i y 
- a 
i j 
1 
* 4 D 
+2 » h9-F 
114 
14 
147 = 4 
4% 
4.4 
$ I / 
a 7 
46 
1 I 
SS 
- 
oy 
1 
*, 
a 


Z Ee i IE! $270 ES Sh 


: 1 C 
8 * 


Nouns Adjective. Chap. y 
Joyous lzetus firs ſex * 
or ſad i ſeven ſeptem 
.  |erghe octo 
223. Goods are jw Hos | 
, DIC ten decem p . 
one's own, proper pröprius — e I 
W thirty triginta ö by 
care Ov an hundred centum J 5 
or publick publicus s thouſand mille * 
; Fs | an both ambo æ o. | 1 
| 224. Qu. 227. As to their number 
q How big is it quantus things are 10 
| A. % big, ſo much tantus many multzs a um 23 
; great magnus or few paucas a um eus 
] little parvus all omnis is e Te 
1 big _ grandis frequent frequens cz. lulu, 
or /mall, fender exilts or ſeldom, rare rarus a um | Q 
| 225. As to its meaſure |— 3 
a thing 18 + Qu. 
long longus of what number or 
wad fhor 4 _ in what order is 1 =—_ 5 
broad atus A. it is firft prima . 0 
or narrow anguſtus ſecond — 5 
ample, large amplus third tẽrtia⸗ 1 It 
1 vaſt vaſtus fourth quartzs 1 hi 
F high altus ; | fifth  _quintzs Whin/elf 
| or loo humilis ſixth lextys pau. 
| | 1 £ —eoenth ſeptimus 1 
i . eighth oQtivus | 
| 226. Qu. ninth none a þ es ſel) 
how many quot und. tenth decimus | Wh; 
EE, : 5 the middlemoft medius | We /am 
A. Things are 2 
So many tot und. 229. Hereafter you agg, on 
one ũnus a um learn j one 
t eo duo æ © | Io W one o 
g © 2 mare us ris 
three tres -es ia even the ref 75 er .2un if bat, w, 
four quatüor 2 , | 34.02 
five quinque 5 | Whether 


Pꝛonouns. 27 


CHAT 


Concerning a Pronoun. | 


2 OW that you have learned the Nouns, both Subſtantive and Ad- 
jective; next tell me what is a Pronoun. | 
| 230. 4. A Pronoun is a Word that is uſed inſtead of a Noun Sub- 
; an 3 as, 
3 Inſtead of my Name, I ſay J. Ego. 
I Inſtead of thy Name, I ule Thou, Tu. 
A” Inſtead of his Name, I fay He, ille. 
Q. How many ſuch words be there that be Pronouns? 
231. 4. There be fifteen Pronouns : Ego, tu, ſui, ille, ipſe, iſte, hic, is, 
neus, tuus, ſuus, noſter, veſter, noſtras, and veltras. 
To which may be added theſe, quid, quis, cũjũs, cljas, aljus, idem, 
» nullus, qui, quidam, uter, neuter, alter. 
Aste theſe Pronouns Subſtantive or Adjective? | 


232. 4. Quid, ego, tu, and ſui, are Pronouns Subfantive, all the reſt 
— are Pronouns Adjective. | 


| 
| 


The Pronouns. 


233. C What is it quid n. IA. either or one 2 Alte | 
Mb? or which is It quis | of the two [D wal 
1 It is 7 £20 neither of the two neuter 
* tu 235. QA boſe is it cũjũs 
Winſelf ſui A. It is mine mèũs 
pal 2 ille thine tüds 
| N or is his own SUUs | 
7 or iſtẽ ours nõſtꝰ r ra rum 
ants hs ips& yours veſter ra rum 
| Wir hic their own - onus | 
J WW /ane idem 236. M whatR --- 
ql . mother | alius tribe is he t 5 | "TY 
ne one quidam A. of our tribe noftra; n 
) one ullus {of your tribe vẽſtrã⸗ 
d one or none nullus | | 
„ which, who qui 
£34. Qubich or 
Wb! tbr of the Hüter 
WO 


[A 


1 ww 
"PEPE ror IT ras ww. —_ — — 


r 


—— * 3 
- =». . at Eidos . — 5 — 
inks 4 G 


q -_ - 
* — — 9 
vw 


gey 


1 
n 
* . 6 * 
"_ — K 
8 be F + — on 


— —UÜ[„[ä — RS 2 


28 Uerbs Peuter. Chap. VII 


CHAP. VI. 


Of a Verb. 


HU s you have ſeen the Nouns and the Pronouns, now 14] 15 
what is a Verb. 

= A. A Verb is a part of Speech that betokeneth to w to Du 

to Siffer. 

Q. Which words then are Verbs ? 


238. A. All thoſe words are Verbs, which betoken either to Be, or 11 3 


Do, or to Suffer, i. e. to be done, or acted upon. 
2 How many ſorts of Verbs are tbere? 
239. A. There are three ſorts of Verbs. 
I. Some betoken 70 be, as, eſſe to be, fieri ta become, cilere to by by, 
and ſuch are called Verbs Meuter. 
II. Some betoken 79 do, as, amare 20 love, agere t0 act, audire 20 hn 
and theſe are called Verbs Active. 
III. Some betoken 70 be done, or to be acted upon, as àmäri to be lm, 
agi to be done, audiri to be heard; and theſe are called Verbs Paſſive. 
240. N. B. 4/! 1 (except eſſe] have their firſt ending either, 
| I are or art 8 3 3. In Fre or 1 


2. In ẽre or eri In ire or iti 
A Vocabulary of Verbs, eſpecially Primitive, 
F. 1. Exemples of Verbs Neuter. 
1. AQ Verb Neuter be- 244. Things good o2 badil: 


tokens to be pleaſing, to plicere 
20 be elle | pleaſe | 
9 e harmful, to 8 
242. That, which is, uſes . A 
23 become fieri pain dolere 
25 grow _ creſcere : = 
29 continue or a574e manere | 245. As to their ſtate thing 
. | uſe 
. Ws a6 is, the to be able poſſe 
thing uſes to be well or frong valere 
1o be empty vicire % pine or languiſb languere 
1s want or be MD 8 . 
be | carere 246. As to its poſture it ua 
to want or need Extre to lie along Jacere | 
8 : (io hang pendere 
tofiickor cleave to herere 


A hap. VII. Verbs Active. i ö 29 
, to be warm tepere | 
247 To the ſenſes things to be hat calere | 
, uſe | 
q 0 * the aps 
lit fair, fo appear parere £49 To the Car | Pp 
. be chen or plain patere | pear 
„ie bid, to lurk latere to be ſilent sllere 
le clear Iiquẽre IE” 0 . 
250. at the a or ſo 
"I :45. To the Couch they mf 
* ] *PP 8 80 to be allowed INicere 1 
= TI frigere | 70 lite them livers 


er, 


WA 
v af, or to do 


, 51. K Ucrb Active ſignifies 


agere 


52. That which acts ought 


to ſhake it 


to turn 


$ 2. Exemples of Verbs Active. 


255. To move a thing is 
to ſtir or raiſe it ciere | 


quarere 
vertere 


256. To move it toꝛward is 


to lead it dicere 

to thruft tradere 

to drive pellere 

to roul volvere - 

to ſend or fling mittère 

to caſt or throw yacere 

to drato trähère 

to carry vehere 

257. The thing moving is 

ſaid 

to go ire 

to come venire 

to follow SEqui 

to give 7 * cadtre 

or go off 

to fly ſugere 

to ſtray or reve errare 

to leap or jump *alire 


258, What is not faſt as 


5 begin to act cæppiſſe 
þ begin a work ordiri 
| b carry on gerere 
j fiſh or n {finire 
nate or o facers 
dt 253. To make i is 
þ create . creire 
fame or Janis fingere 
erm formãre 
254. To act is 
nove movere 
„Dee urgere 
thugs [put ponere 
I manage or rule regere 
bend flectẽre 
Uiretth  tendere 
y bange mutare 
Wt, to let alone sinère 
it uſe rave,or forſake linquere 
pear ferre 
| Lendure or ji fuffer pati 
ave habere 
. 7 er  tegere 


to tremble 
to fall 


to ruſb or tumble ruère 


tremere 
cadere 


259. To 


30 : Uerbs Active. Chap. vn 


4 oo 


259- 10 ne a thing is 


to increaſe it augere 
80 fill plere 

to adorn ornare 
fo paint pingere 


260. To have a ching i. is 


#0 take or containit capere 
zo hid it faſt tenere 
to keep or ſave ſervãre 


261. Good ings ule 
#0 nouriſh * Alere 
zo cheriſh fovere 
to bleſs, or make Q 1 vie 
bappy 1 
40 Belp | Juvare 


262. Evil things uſe 


'to hurt or harm 1lzdere 


1 affright terrẽre 
to trouble or di- : 
flurb $ turbare 
263. Lightſome bodies uſe 
to ariſe oriri 
to ſpine llüũcère 


to peter or teoinklem! icare 


— 


Acts of Lifeleſs things. 


264. Fire uſeth 


10 burn or be 2 

kindled 5 
to burn or ſcorch ũrère 
to toaſt or roaſ} torrere 


263. Water uſes 


ardere 


to flaw flüëre 
to boil up - fervere 
to rain plucre 


— | , 
The Ads of Animal, 


To 

266. Animals are wont WW: 

to be born naſci | 1G 
to live © VivEre l 
to ſenſe or feel ſentire 1 2. 


to remove or flit migrire 


267. Their life impoyer 2 


them | 
to be able quire , 
%% dare or venture audere * 
to try expèrĩri 1 ei 
to fludy or labour ftidere F * 
to ſeen after peter E 373. 
to beware of cavere | 
to get or obtain potiri q 
o uſe or make 3 Tick 
. , 
to enjoy früi 0e d 
268. That they may uu : 
they uſe AF 
to eat  Edere i 
to drink bibere . 
to ſwallow vorare | þ res 
to play or ſport lũdère 1 71 
to ſleep dormire , wy 
4 make 
269. To ſenſe or perceive ſh «uu 
ſenſe 1s | 1 275 
to ſee a thing videre h wee) 
to hear it audire ar, 
to ſmell it Sqdõrãti an! 
to taſte it guſtire t 4 
to touch it tangere | 
270. That things may x { * 
ſenſed they ought [ 
to ſound sönãre Veet or 
to tafte of or ſavour sapere bear e 
to ſmell or caſt $ ole TY 
7 ere He 
a ſme h nus ſe 
271. To ſounds 27. 
to make a moiſs firepere EY 
to crack ſtridere i 


wi Bb 1 
ep. VII. Aerbs Active; 37 
. . 5 ; ” AI * * —̃ñ̃ ͤ WK— a 
b e © crepare Acts of their members. 

q fremere 2 

. — 78. With hos Limbs they 

40 When they remove they ts climb ſcandere 

3 uſe - to fight pugnare 

en 1 Sas gradi to flrike againſt offendere 
201 ambilare "0 FOp carpere 

Þ 77 a foot pace vadere to pluck vellere 

un currere 

2 a 279. With their head they 

11 voͤlare uſe 

55 When chey do not go to nod nuere 

? ; W 280. With their eyes wen 

an r 

ö Th sedere uſe 

| ciibire to ſpie ſpecere 

þ gown 5 to Ren or diſcern cernere 


li" 1 Animals when oppꝛeſſed 


| uſe to eaſe themſelves, 


. that is 
h jreak wind pẽdère 
it or ſpue ſpuere 
WW 0011 vomere 
nate water meière 
ung cacare 
275. When ill they uſe 
Þ weep flere 
W mourn lagere 
v complain queri 
1 lie mori 
' bi be. Their young ones they 
= uſe 
2 FRE 5 generire 
© er gigntre 
Near or bring 0 
TY Epirire 
. nütrire 
77. Live things they uſe 
LES venar) 
angle ſtrangüläre 
54 neEcare 


an horſe uſes to 
neigh 
an als t bray 
a bullock 70 loro 
a lion to roar 
an hog to grunt 
a dog to bark 
a ſheep 9 bleat 


to behald or lack 10 tũẽri 


281. With their Pouth chey 


uſe 
to breathe f pirire 
282. With their voice they 
| uſe 
to cry out clamare 
to groan gèmère 
to fing cänère 
to mutter mutire 
to howl ululare 


283. Particularlp 


hinnire 


rũdꝭ re 
mũgire 
rügire 
grunnire 
Jatrare 
balare 


284. With 


* - —_ 4 * 
a Dr * 
4 r * * 0 4 CET PER 
— . + \ 2 
ä b 


* 
—— 


_ a 
N % * 2 
— —ͤ—ũ—4—ä—ͤ — 


to bite 


40 weigh 


t judge 


83 OY 
2 


32 Uerbs Active. | 


Chap, Me 


284. With their fongue they 


uſe 
to lick lingere 
to lap lambere 
to ſuck sũgẽére 
285. With the teeth they 
we 


to champ or chew mandere 
to gnato rodere 
mordere 


286. With their nails or 


claws they are able 
to claw ſcabere 
to ſcratch | ſcalpere 
to rub or "> 5 
terere 
away 


uſe 
to hate odifle 
to cContemm Or - 
; temnere 
IT ons 
10 ſcorn ſpernere 


The Acts of Men. 
287. A Pan 1s able 


to know or un- 8 
derſtand 5 n 
to remember mẽminiſſe 
to will velle 
28 8. That he may tnderſftand 
he ought | 
to confider considerire * 
to meditate meditar1 


to know or take CEre 
knowledge of * 


pendere 

289. It is the act of his 

Judgment 
jũdicare 

to approve or like provare 

te eſteem or prize zſtimare 


to condemn damnare 
to think putare 
to believe credere 
40 truſs fidere 


5 


220. What they paize thy 
uſe 


to love amire 
to wiſh for optare 
to. hope ſperire 
ta defire or covet cupere 
to jeek quzrere 
to favour favere 


to joy or rejoice in gaudere 
to wonder or admiremirarl 


291. What they diſliks thy 


2 timeEre 
to 3 
fear or area J . 


9 ul 


The Duty of Man. 
292. It is the duty of a Py 


duely to regard colere 
to conſult consulere 
to care _ curare 


to make ready, 8 pirire 

prepare 
to ſerve or deſerve merert 
| Tr 
293. When a Man dots nie * * 


his dutp he 1s {aid © to fra 
to fail or deceive fallere 1 2 
t | eccare car 
128 P 10 lay 


294. To do well us 1 »: 


to become one decere — 
| = 
The Acts of our Meme 

295. With our mouths" | 299, 

ule MM 
to laugh ridere to nun 
to talk jõqui 10 C47 
1% prate garrire tt mx 


[wp VII. Herbs Active. ; 33 


3 


Y. , bold our peace tacere 11 jeyn jungẽre 


| 
J — | zo {catter ſpargere | | 
206. By our ſpeech we uſe | to divide _ dividere | 
It: rogare | fo e Os tribuere 
15 tell narrare | give out | 


t confeſs . fãtẽri 


32 diere 300. That whic 


| or 10 Hrn * « . open S ſhut claudẽte 

J to deny RESAT hut ä 8 fling open pandere 
297. The particular uſes of ud e monies 

ſpeech _ 301. That which withfands 

y ſuear jurare them they are able 

© tg 0000 vovere 

i adnoniſb monere to frike  Icere 


"ou to beat or oper- N . v | 
© to adviſe ſuadere vincere | 


L 5 8 coe | 
* —4 YI T poſetre to tame or ſubdue domire | 

J 21 bid or command jubere fe pore Rn | 

n bid or invite invitare 302. Wafer men are wont 

4 * re to draw | ha urĩre | 

1 : an — to peur or pour out fundère 

and 1 | 

| le, A nd in it 7% waſp Javare | 

u promiſe or en- ſpondere 303. Animals men uſe 

Lahe - to feed paſcere | 

% praiſe laudare % milk mulgere | | 
3 to clip or ſhear tondere ni 
| 4 | 304. Men employed uſe 1 

. give dire \ | #2 /e11 yendere 4 

i take sümère to buy e 

i ſnatch rapere to owe debere 

© to lift or take up tollere to build ſtrucre 

in carry portãre to dreſs or cook coquere | 

12 prendere 5 When Men eat a meal 

uſes to catch 
they are ſaid | 
3 to break faſt jentãre 
Their acts about ſeveral | 7 dine prandere 


things. , | to ſup cæœnãre | 
[299 If there be diverſe things! Mens acts by Inſtrunbents. 


they are able : | 
/ 306. With an inſtrument 
1 8 them numerare | | 

men are able 


1 gather or chuſe legere 
1 mix or mingle miſcere to thump or knock tundere 


34 Uerbs Paſſive. Chap, VII ch. 


to break frangere to eftabliſh a law ſanciie = 
to bur/} rumpere to puniſh punire 2. G1 
to preſs or ſqueeze premere | 
to defend defendere 311. It's the duty of the 
307. With a ſharp inſtrument ruled 3. & 
they uſe to obey | obedire J 
3 to fear, land in arve vrẽri BY 
to cut SECAre "TT, 
ro feſt 1 312. It's the work of 
to cleave ndere : Jie 
to ſmite or to hack cædùère _ o teach _—_ 1 
0 prick | pungere 55 5 3's 
to torite {cribere e Imitari Non 
| ; | others to cure, mEder | 
308. With a cleanſing In- | or hea! 8 
ſtrument they uſe to cure, or loo to curãre 
E to ſew süère 
to ſweep or bruſh verrere 55 3 
to purge or cleanſe purgare to grind möère 
apo | —_— ſome to dig fodere | 
29 poliſh * to plow arare N Q 7 
309. With a Band they plan: plantire *F; f 
are able 313. It's the work of th 8 15 
to bind vincire 317. 
to gird cingere De eller are bo 
to Ho vière 0 ne pectere | 
\ 0 trim up comere „ J 70 
And then they uſe to cloath or array imicire aid 
to looſe or lyſen ſolvère to put on inducre 1 
% put of exucre 
The acts of ſome particular] 314. That which ads d, 
ſtates of Men. is ſaid % 
t 7 318. 4 
310. It's the act of a Ruler l 9 a 8 ſuere 4 the ] 
fo reign  Tegnire | to uſe or to wont 5$0lere 8 5 
| to govern \giibernare to exerciſe exercere 4 i wt 
Ez | £ 1. I ar. 
5 §. 3. Of Verbs Paſſive. Th 
t ff : 7 4. 1 L 
4 Q. Thus you have ſeen Verbs Neuter and Verbs Active, now proceed We In iti, 
tze how are Verbs Paſſive made? Mb 
315. A. A Verb Paſſive is formed from the Afive by changing L Depo 
amare to lobe, amäri to be louęd. ll 7; riſe 
1. are 1210 ari, as creare to create, crearl to be created. bp! fo be 
mutare #9 change, mutari is be changed. r n be 


— 


35 


333 — — 


Uerbs Common, Deponent. 


E Chap. VII. 

3 | docere to teach, doceri to be taught. 
2. cre into ẽri, 4. habere to have, haberi to be had. 

43 tenere 20 Bold, teneri to be held. 

J " legere 20 read, legi to be read. 

3 ere inte i, as C emere 70 buy, emi to be bought. 
agere o do, agi to be done. 

N. B. But ferre to bear, hath ferri to be born, and facere to ds, * fieri 


? be done. 


1 
\ 
{ 
i 
| 
| 
| 
| 


| audire to hear, audiri tv be heard. 
7 + ire into iri, a5 & punire to puniſh, puniri 1% be puniſhed. 
finire zo fniſb, finiri to be finiſhed. 
N. B. Thus of Actives in re are made Paſſives in i. | 
Now tell me the Paſſives of theſe Verbs Actives following, 


—— — 


N laudare flere debere movere arare | 
| ſumere haurire nüũtrire ripere frangere | 
| ſuadire purgare fentire cedere mordere, c. 


§. 4. Of Verbs Common. 


EQ I there no more to be known about Verbs ? | 
316. 4. Yes, there are yet three things to be known about Yong 
bat is the firſt thing ? 

317. 4. I. Some Verbs in 7 ſignifie both to aF and to be acted upon, and 
d are both Active and Paſve, and are therefore called Cler bs py ; 


| „ a 2 = a 2 „2 . 
1 9 7 comfort, and a ex hort, nd] os 3 meaſure nd 
io be comforted to be exhorted ts be meajured 


j 
| 
1 


the 


8 5. Of Verbs Deponent. 


IQ. Which is the ſecond thing, yet to be known ? | | 
318. 4. II. Moſt of the Common now ſignify only Actively, having lata 
be the Paſive Signification, and are therefore called Verbs N 
IQ. What then is a Verb Deponent ? 

B19. 4. A Verb Deponent is that which ends in i, 46 a cn but 
Pikes only Actively to Do? ſo, | 

. In art, as fari to : ſpear, meditari to mn/e, venari 70 Bunt, Kc. 

s eri, as vereri zo fear, tuEri 10 /ook to, mederi tv Heal, Ce. | 

|. Ini, as pati zo fuffer, gradi to flep, mori to die, &c. | 

7 25 as mentiri 79 lie, ordiri: t begin, experiri #2 try, & c. | 
1 tell me which of tbeſe Verbs are Paſſive, which Common, and | 
5 Deponent? | 

Þ to riſe _- (ati z 4ſ½ : 4 to t8:1 

boi to be bur/? [hauriri to be drawn oſculari 1 Lie 
ſer! 10 be afrighted venari to hunt ui 79 enfay. 


it = 


z oft 


f 


21 U 


Verbs ſignifying Perkedly, 


8. 6. Of Verbs ſignitying Perfelth to have * 


to have done, to have been done. 


Q. Which is the third thing to be farther known ? 
320. A. III. That all the Verbs you have hitherto heard of, fen 


Imper fedly 0 be, to do, or to be done; but they muſt be turned in 3 
another ending to make them fignifie perfectly 79 have been, U 


done, to have been done. 
N. B. Where obſerve that in ver Verb you muſt exactly * 
1. The Infinite Imperfect. 
2. The Infinite Perfect. 
3. The Supine, of which you ſhall hear more in the next Chapter, 
Q. Why are theſe three to be ſo exattly known in the firſt place? 
321. A. Becauſe theſe three are the principal Mons of Verbs, u 
from thele all the reſt are formed, as you ſhall ſee hereafter. 
Q. Tell me then how T ſhall know theje three endings in every Virb? 
322. A. The Imperfe& you have heard already, the Perfect and 1 
Supine are formed from that Imperfe& by theſe five Rules. 


F. I. Verbs in re made Perfect. 


R. I. are in the Imperfect is changed into aviſe in the Perfect, 
dtum in the Supine; as, 

creire to create creaviiſe to have created creãtum to create 

formare to form formaviſſe to have formed formatum to forn 

laudare to praiſe laudaviſſe to have praiſed laudatum 10 praiſt 
So form mutire, errare, putare, ornare, and the reſt in are, 

Q. Are all in are jo formed ? 

323. A. No, for 
Dare zo give, makes dediſſe 20 have given, datum 10 give; and 
ſtare 70 _ makes ſtẽtiſſe to have flood, ſtatum to fland. 


$. II. Verbs in #re. 


Q. Which is the ſecond Rule? 
324. A. R. II. Theſe Verbs in Fre are formed by changing #re in! 

Imperſect into S in the Perfect, and Sim in the Supine; as, 

. Here 79 weep flevifſe to have wept fletum 20 weep 
nere 70 ſpin neviſſe to have ſpun netum 70 pin 
plere 2 fill pleviſſe to have filled pletum 70 fill 
delere ts blot out deleviſſe to have blotted out deletum to bat u 
viere 2% hoop vievifle to hare hooped vietum to hor 
ſuere 79 u/e ſueviſſe io have uſed ſuetum 0 aſe 
Q. Which is the third Rule? 

325. A. R. III. Other Verbs in Zre change 7re in the Imperſeſt 

2% in the Perſect, and 7:um in the Supine ; 
monere to advi/e monuiſſe to have adviſed monitum #0 ados 
ſtucere to Hud ſtudüiſſe to have fudied ſtuditum to fd 
habere 7 have havuiſle fo have Had habitum to have. 


So form calzre, monere, debere, valére, dölére, and the reſt in if! 


- Chap, vi 


re in 


petere 
cüͤpere 


F bibsre 


ſuãdẽ 
E ardere 


Q 
330 
alet 
mo) 


E freme: 
E ocme! 
E vome! 
© colere 
consũ 
| rapere 


Q 
331 
Ex 


| 51ncre 


33% 


333 


4. 4 
5 
S 
RD 


| 
1 7 "i VII. Verbs ſignifying Perfectly, | 37 
| „„ 
N B. But ſome ae the ſbort 1 of the Supine caft away; as, | 
I 1225 to Hold. tenuiſſe, ten'tum, for tenitum. | 
WW gocere 70 teach, docuiſſe, doc'tum, for docitum. | | 
| milcere to mingle, miſcuiſſe, miſtum or mixtum for _— 
| but torrẽre, torruiſſe, toſtum. 
0 Are all in ere ſo formed? 
4 5 A. No, for there are four Exceptions. 
ind F Except. 1. In ſome the ĩs left out, ſo that they have not wy but %; as, 
ain idere vidiſſe viſum favere fäviſſe fautum 
4 ou sẽdiſſe ſeſſum fovere fõviſſe fõtum 
Eprandere prandiſſe pranſum movere möviſſe motum 
ſtridere ſtridiſſe —— vövẽre voviſſe . votum 
Fcavere cãviſſe cautum fervẽre ferviſſ.ſe 


. oo pendere pependiſſe penſum tondẽre tõtondiſſe tonſum 
nordẽete momordiſſe morſum ſpondẽre ſpoſpondiſſe ſponſum 
2 328. Except. 3. ſome take in an s before %, and ſo make //z; as, 
id (W'mancre manſiſſe manſum mulgere mulxifſe mulctum 
E jubere juſsifle juiſum frigcre frixiſſe F 
augere auxiſſe auctum lũcẽre luxiſſe — ——_— 
a % lisere luxiſſe luctum 
3209 Except. 4. Of theſe in / ſome caſt off the Letter befote 1 e; as, 
„ dere rĩſiſſe rĩſum audéèẽre auſum 
„ foidere ſuäſiſſe ſuãſum urgẽre urſiſſe = — 
% acere arſiſſe arſum herere heæſiſſe hæſum 
[ III. Verbs in #re. | 
Q Which is the fourth Rule for the Perfect and Supint? 
E 330. 4. R. IV. Verbs in łre make the Perfect and Supine by changing 
cre in the Imperfect into 4 iſe in the Perfect, and 7run in the Supine; as, 
alere to nouriſh aluifie to have nouriſhed Alitum to nouriſh 
© molere to grind mölüiſſe to have ground molitum ts grind; 
pfremere fremuiſſe frémitum and velle (for volere] voluiſſe — 
, WW gcmere geEmuifſe gemitum enere old, . 
FAY Evomere vömüifle ons = 3 genüiſſe 3 
Cre coluifle cultum ſtrẽpẽre Krepuiſſe ſtrẽpitum | 
| consulere consälüiſle conſaltum | ſapere sàpüiſſek(kw 
rapere räpüiſſe raptum © ann 
A e all in Ece formed by üiſſe, itum ? DE 
331. 4. No, there are eleven Exceptions. | 
© Except. 1. Some caſt away a Letter before ꝝiſſe; as, | 
nere fiviſſe situm põnère pos üiſſe pösitum 
fel 332. Except. 2. Some take a long i before uiſſe, and have Zum long; as, 
„ petere petiviſſe petitum quzrere quæsiviſſe quæsltum 
vl 1 cupiviſſe cupitum terEre triviſſe t'ritum 
j 333- Except. 3. The reſt in er caſt off the a and make e; as, 
. be bibiſſe bibitum ſcäbere ſcäbiſſe 


327. Except. 2.In four sf theſe the firſt Letter is doubled with aVowel; as, 


— ——2— . —— — 


— — 


38 Gerbs ſignifying Perfedtly. Chap. yy 
icere icifſe ictum cœpere cœpiſſe ee 
Edere ẽdiſſe ẽſum or eſtum Emre Emile 8 
: panſum & | verrere verrifle verſ 
pandere pandiſſe paſlum | vertere vertiſſe ee 
mandere mandiſſe manſum tribuere tribuiſſe tribũtum 
ror ae ſcandiſſe ſcanſum indüère induiſſe indũtum 
or" J fendere fendiſſe ſenſum rag exuiſſe exũtum 
pluere pluiſſe —g 
1 prendiſſe prenſum | niicre nuiſſe nutum 
fodere födiſſe foſſum { ſpucre ſpuiſſe ſpũtum 
rudere rũdiſſe c -- | rUere ruiſſe ruĩtum 
le re legitfe lectum metuere metuiſſe 
fugere _ N ſucre Suiſſe sũtum 
: velliſſe ſolvere ſolviſſe ſolũtum 
ere 3 vulſiſſe vulſum volvere volviſſe volũtum 
334. Except. 4. Some of theſe in 7/7 loſe a Letter; as, 
vincere viciſſe victum fundere fuadiſſe fuſum 
icindere ſcidiſſe ſciſſum linquère liquiſſle lictum 
findere fidiſſe fiſſum rumpere rũpiſſe ruptum 
335. Except. oF kad ſome in ie change a Letter; as, 
facere fecifle factum frangere fregiſſle fractum 
Jacere jecille jactum cãpère cẽpiſſe captum 
agere | egiſſe actum 
336. Except. 6. Some double in the Perfect; as, 
diicere didiciſſe tendere tëtendiſſe tenſum 
poſcere eee tundexre tütüdiſſe tunſum 
. Eperciſſe „I tangère tetigiſle tactum 
4 Se: "wa : 1 pupügiſe & Tuna 
cadere cecidiſle caſum Bangen punxiſſe Cpun " 
cædere cecidifſe cæſum fallere fefellifle falſum 
peacre pèpẽdiſſe peditum pelicre pepellifſſe pulſum 
| credere crẽdidiſſe crẽditum canere cecinifle cantum 
vendere vendidiſſe venditum {| pirtre peperifle partum 
pendere Ppependiſſe penſum | currere cucurrifle curſum 
337. Except. 7. Some take in an before 1, and ſo make „ie; 4 
dicere dixiſſe dictum 1 Pingere pinxiſſe pictum 
ducere duxiſſe ductum jungere junxiſſe junctum 
regere rexiſſe rectum sũgère ſuxiſſe zũctum 
tégere texiſſe tectum cõmère comſiſſe comtum 
cingere cinxiſſe cinctum promere promſiſſe promtum 
lingére linxiſſe linctum sümère ſumſiſſe ſumtum 
mingere / . ; carpëre carpſiſſe carptum 
zew meicre minxifſe mictum beige ſcalpfille en 
fingere finxiſſe fictum | | 
338. Except. 8. Of which ſome change the Letter before ; 25 
fcribere ſcripſiſſe ſcriptum cedcre ceſſiſſe ceſſum 
trahcre traxiſſe tractum gerere geſſiſſe geſtum 


yeher 


Eyadere 
dere 
| vide 
f xogere 

dere 
| | püder ( 
7 dude 


Chat 
eber 


töquc 
3 dreme 


339 


| 349 


| ore 


341 


[paſcere 
| greſcer 
Enoſcer, 
Eiperne 
terre 


Yenire 


Exc 


incire 


Exce 


Haurire 


N.B 


£1; perl 


Gone | it 


IL 


ere 


vl perfectly done, are turned into an ending 


. hap. VII. Uerbs ſignifying Perkealp. 


39 
nie vexiſſe vetum ürkre uſſiſſe uſtum 
Vqusre coxiſſe coctum quatere quaſſiſſe quaſſum 
remère preſſiſſe preſſum vivcre vixiſſe victum 
339. Except. 9. Some others leave out the Letter before e; as. 
idere Valifſe vãſum ſpargere iparſiſſe ſparſum 
dere Izfifſe læſum temncre temſiſſe temtum 
Avidere av more flectere na" . flexum 
dare röſiſle rolum 1 pexiſſe 
Pe - luſifſe luſum pectere Ledi | P 2 

Wide träſiſſe trũſum mittere mĩſiſſe miſſum 
daudere clauſiſſe clauſum | 
340. Except. 10. Some take in a Letter before ; as, 
Ffucre fluxiſſe fluxum | ſtruere ſtruxifle ſtructum 
341. Except. 11. Some few are otherwiſe formed; as, 
piccre päviſſe paſtum eſſe fü iſſe — — 
Fercſccre crẽviſſe cretum tollere ſuſtüliſſe ſublatum 
Enoſcecre növiſſe notum cernere creviile crẽtum 
Epernere ſpreviſſe ſprẽtum polle pötüiſſe 
terre tüliſfe läãtum B | 
$. IV. Verbs in 7re made Perfect. | 
Q. What is the fifth Rule to form the Perfect and Supine ? 
342. A. R. V. Verbs in Tre are ſormed by changing 7re in the Imperfect 
Linto 77 % in the Perfect, and Ituẽs in the Supine; as, | 
© audire to hear audiviſſe 2% have heard anditum to hear 
| finire to end finiviſſe to have ended finitum to end 
ſcire to know ſciviſſe to have known ſcitum to knot 


So form mũgiĩre, rigire, nũtrire, mũtĩte, garrire, and the reſt in ire: 


But Ire to go iviſle to have gone 
Ae all Verbs in ire ſo formed? | 
343. A. No, there are four Exceptions. | 
Except. 1. Some caſt off the i and ſo make vi/2; as, 


FA 
| rum r go 


amicuiſſe àmictum 


8 


ſanctum 


ie; as, 


{enſum 


Hlire sälüiſſe ſaltum | amicire 

Except. 2. Some caſt off the 2 too, and make 1e; as, | 
Fenire veniſle ventum Co | 
Except. 3. Some of theſe take in an x and make xi/z; Al 
Vincire vinxiſſe vintum | fancire ſanxifle {| 
Except. 4. And of theſe ſome caſt away the Letter before 
hurire hauſiſſe hauſtum ſentire ſenſiſſe 


N.B. Thus Verbs in re fignifying Imperſectly that the thing is 
in iſſe, to betoren 
done it perfectly, and to them we have till added the Supine. 
Are all Verbs jo to be turned? | 

344. A. No; for, 1 

1. Some Verbs have no Supines, as you have ſeen before. 
2. Some have no 
ere ſiſu 


* 
1 
2 


8 


a doing and 
that it hath 


Perſechs, as audère ——auſum, gaudere —gaviſum, 


3. Some 


do {| Participles. 


3. Some have no Perfect nor Supine, as aiere, Sc. 
4. Some have no Inperfect, as —cœpiſſe, ceptum—meminiſſe —0di 
oſum. * 
5. Verbs in # have no Perfect, but how they may be made to fon 
Perfectly you ſhall learn No 605. BY 
Q But have Verbs in i no Supine ? 
345. 4. Verbs Common and Deponent in 7 have a Spin- by changiy 
I. ar! into atum, as ſolãri ſolãtum, venari venitum, oſculiri oſculatu 
2. Sri into 1tum, as vererl veritum, tucri tüftum, merer1i merityn, | 
but fat ri bath faſſum, and mederi- = 1 
3. By changing i into itum, as mori to die, moritum to die; u ME 


Chap. vj 


— 


naſci H natum loqui —— lõcutum Foy fri WW 35 
obliviſci oblitum queri——--queſtum i frutun WE 
gradi-- greſſum pati paſſum 5 
sè qui ſecũtum ut i ũſum | | 
4 iri into itum, as mentiri— mentitum, potiri — potitum, 1 
| but ordiri=—orſum experiri —— expertum | 
oriri ortum metir i menſum. wa 0 


c HA IF 
Of a Participle. 35 


o 91 HUS you have ſeen the Nouns, Pronouns, and Verbs, hH 
fort of words is a Participle, what is a Participle ? 14 ie 

346. 4. A Participle is a Part of Speech derived of a Verb, and betii 
being, doing or ſuffering as a Verb does, but is otherwiſe like a Noun WF 35: 


Q. Which Words then are Participles ? ready, 
347. A. All thoſe Words are Participles which, 4 Q 
1. Are derived from ſome Verb. | | ow j 
2. Betoken being, doing or ſuffering, as a Verb does. | 353 
3. And are in other reſpects as Nouns. 3 . 
Q. How many ſorts of Participles are there? = i be 4 
348. A. There are fix forts of Participles. | am: 
Q. How are theſe derived from their Verbs ? FF {4 
349. A. The fix ſorts of Participles are formed off from their i fact 
according to theſe Rules. 334 
350. R. I. From the Verb Infinite Imperfect are formed thice f fes a0 
ciples. vac 
I. The Participle in aus, ens, or iens, by changing, ami 
I. are or Arl inte ans + doc 
. "4 a 1 and theſe ſignifie being or doing; às, . 
4. Ire or iri into iens | | nex 
CF vacare to be empty Vacans being ent) MW flex 
1. From G amare to love amans loving mor 
mirari to wonder mirans $00ndrings ; 355 


6 $6 | 


I VIII. Puartitiples. 


| 
| 
f 
— | | 
lere 10 be Hot, calens being Bot 


41 

n from docere to teach, docens _ reaching 
4 vereri to fear, verens earing 
N legere to read, v. reading 

z. from emere to buy, emens buying 
I als to feed, veſcens feeding 

| audire to hear, - audiens hearing 

© 4. from < haurire to draw, hauriens drawing 

$3 mentir1 to Jye, mentiens ying. 


351. II. The participle in andus, endus or jendus, b changing, 
1. Iri into andus © | 
2. Eri into endus And theſe in dus ſignify paſſively to be done; 


3. 1 into endus or about to be done or ated uin as, 

| 4. ri into lendus | 

E amari to be loved, amandus one to be loved 

1 from & damnãri to be damned, damnandus one to be damned 
mĩrãri to admire, mirandus one to be admired 
doceri to be taught, docendus one to be taught 

2. from & habEri to be had, habe ndus one to be had 

, verẽri to fear, verendus one to be feared 

j legi to be read, legendus one to be read 

3. from früi to enjoy, fruendus one to be enjoyed 

| naſci to be born, naſcendus one to be born 
audiri to be beard audiendus one to be heard 

4. From & nũtriri to be nurſed, nutriendus one to be nurſed 

metĩri to be meaſured, metiendus one to be meaſured 


352. III. The firſt Supine in um or ſum, of which you have heard al- 
| ready, Chap. VII. F. 6. | 

| Q. Thus we have the three Participles formed from the 
I Jay whence are the other three Participles formed? | 

E. II. From the firſt Supine in am come three other Participles. 

EL The latter Supine, by changing ꝝm into u, and it _ Paſſively 
o be done; as from, 


Verb Inpecſecl. 


amitum to love, amitu fo be loved . 
lectum to read, lectu to be read doctum - doctu 
cir . factum 0 do, factu to de done. | diftum—diau 


| 354. II. The Participle in rus by changing m into urus, and it figni- 
reel. | hes about to be, or about to do; as from | 
| vacitum to be empty, vacãtũrus one about te be empry 


amatum t love a maturus one going to love 

doctum to teach, doctũrus one about to teach 

letum to read, leaurus one about to read 

auditum to hear, audĩtũrus one about to hear 
nexum 5 join, nexürus one about to join 

0 flexum to bend, flexarus one about to bend 
| moritum 0 die, moriturus one about to die. | 


; 355. III. The Participle in 2 or ſus, by changing am into us. _ 
"= Q. How doth this Participle in tus _ lus /ignify ? ddivth, or Paſſroely? 


356. A, 


— — — 


42 


118 356. A. The Participle in s or ſs. | ? 
\f 1. If it come from a Verb Deponent ſignifies Actively having dine; , Wis he 
14 from, locũtum 79 ſpeak, locutus having ſpoke, lapſum to ſlip, lapſus havin A Her 
ſlipt ; ratum to ſuppoſe, ratus having ſuppoſed, &c. ere 
2. If it comes from a Verb Common it ſignifies both Activeh) and Py; WF 
ſively; as from, 1 
menſum to meaſure, menſus having meaſured, and baving been neaſini 
oſculitum 70 ki/s, oſcülãtus having kifed, and having been kiſſed, „ 
3. But if it come from any other Verb, it ſignifies Paſively, Big 302. Q 
been done; as from, 
amãtum to love, amãtus /oved, or being loved, or having been lowed, 
doctum to teach, doctus taught, or being taugbt, or having been tau, 
lectum to read, lectus read, or being read, or having been read. 
auditum 0 hear, auditus heard, or being heard, or having been pearl 
Q. Which of theſe fix Participles fignifie Perfectly? and which Imperia 
357. A. This Participle in 2 or /us ſignifies Perfectly, as locũtus haviy 
ſpoke already, doctus being taught perfectly; the other Participles ſigniſie ly, 
perfectly, that the thing is doing, or about to do, c. but not perfectly don 
Q. Are the Participles Subſtantive or Adjective? 
358. A. The two Supines are Participies Subſtantive, all the reſt ar 
Adjective; amatus one loved, amandus one to be loved. 
Q. Noro tell me what Participles are formed from theſe Verbs? 


Merda) 
e- co hi. 
ace 


narrare venãri farcire ſarcire vidire ng 490 
tenẽre gemere fulcire gerère nectère 365. Q. 
ſorbẽre queri pelleère ſcire monſtrare ſtaps 
vendère frui rumpsre conari polire, &, K 4 / 
Q. From theſe Supines what Participles are formed ? oil: J 
narrãtum venatum fartum ſartum viſum 
tentum gemitum fultum geſtum nexum 

ſorptum queſtym pulſum {citum monltritun 
venditum fruitum ruptuin conatum politum. 


And ſo far of Participles. 


CHAP. IX. 


Of Adverbs. 


Q. VT HAT is an Adverb? 
359. A. An Adverb is a Part of Speech moſtly joined to. 


Verb, to ſhew w4ether or no, or hw, or where, or when any thing i 
does or ſuffers. 


§. The moſt uſual Adverbs, eſpecially Primitive. 


37 
360. Q. Whether ? nũm? in? indeed quidem . 
or no? ne? almoſt fere or ferme ersü 
ts your brother come - no, not _ ne, non, haud Pad 


A. Les, yea, imo, ne 
| 1 


ſcarcely Vvix 


361. 


0.5 


| <5 


Cap X. P2epolifions, | 
by 51. Q. Where übbi until J go doncc | 
is he⸗ 5 366. Q. When returns be? 
BA. Here hic A. Naw nunc, jam 
1 ibi trait, by and by möx | 
Fir any where uſquam if at any time, ever unquam 
% where nuſquam | ever -  nunquam 
| fo of prõcũl 367. Q. How of? quoties ? 
R prope doth he rides 
| Kc. Q. hence unde? A. once semel 
tame he - tevice bis 
BA. Hence hinc thrice ter | 
ene inde four times quiter 
63. QI hither quo ? of t ſepe 
goes he - | always ſemper 
. Hither huc 368. Q. How quõmòdo? 
2 Q. When quando ? doth he act - | 
came he; A. So, thus SIC, ità 
4 Then tunc, tum rafhly temęr& 
ben came cum in va in fruſtrã 
erden her1 we act together simul 
ir ubilt ſometime ] 1 369. Q. Why? quire? car? 
le Hor quam ? 
ug 495 ölim big is he⸗ | 
5 Q. How long quamdiu? IS... tam | 
ſays he - as J quam 
1 7 long time diu more big mägis 
while J ſtap düm than J quam 


UM 


CHART KF 


| 
| 


Concerning Prepoſitions. | 


HAT is a Prepoſition ? 
| 370. A. A Prepoſition is a Word ſet before a Subſtantive and 
Rtokens the reſpe& one thing has to another, as that one thing i is 
before another within it beyond it above It 
bor behind it | or without it, | or behither it, | or bulnes i it, 0c. 
35 How many ſuch Prepoſitions are there? 
371. 4. "hook be three and * Words that are Prepoſitions 


(04 


ng ü | 
The Forty thee Prepoſitions. | 
4 : | 
372. Sect. I. | cis 5 bebither 
13 at, to citra © ſport of 
e etsus towards, againſt circum about, round 
aud at, with circa about, nigh 
before contra ev er-Againſ} 
2 | erga 


rr 2 . To af, 


318. The King comes 


the Queen comes» 


| — 
i o 5 1 I 
4 
2 * 
8 
> 7 9 


44 Conjunctions. Chap. N. cn 
erga towards 37. 1 
extra without, on the out- ab or A or abs from 
intra within (de | ablque without, 1 wii; 
infra beneath, below cum 01th, together nil 
inter between, among |coram befare, in ons . 
juxta beſide, nigh ta |clim out of fight (in 
ob for, becauſe of ae from and concern F 
penes with one, in ones ſex or e out of i 
per through, by (keeping | palam before, in ſg: 
pone behind pre before, more thy ſome 
poſt after, ſince prõ for, inflead if =O! 
præter beſides sine without, mt n e 
propter nigh to, and for | tenus up to ww 
ſecundum after, according to | 374. Se. III. N 
ſecũs by, cloſe by, in in, and tt | mind 
ſupra above, over sũb under N. 
trans over, to the other | ſubter under ll n 
ultra beyond fade] super above 4s 
| ego 
tremè 
C H AF. ͤ | phy! 
| - : teme! 
Of 2 Conjunction. contr. 
Q. HAT is a Conjunfion ? | 
375. A. A Conjunction is a Word which joineth two 
tences together; thus, N 
276. The King comes, if ſi 
and et, que, atque the Queen comes. 
alſo, too quoque 333. The King comes not N. B.“ 
The Queen comes. unleſs ni, nisi 1 
377. Neitber neque, nec, the Queen comes». 1 
the King comes 384. The King comes 39 
nor neque, nec therefore ergo, igitur WW Q. 
the Queen comes the Queen comes+ iq 
378. Eitber aut, vel, ve 385. Although quanqum I more 
the King comes the King tomes, f 
or aut, vel, ve yet, nevertheleſs tamen 1 
the Aueen comes». - | | the Queen comes not. ; 
379. The King comes not 386. The King comes 
but ſed, aſt, at, autem that, to the end that Ut, utl - N. 
the Queen comes. [the Quren ſhould come. ereaſe 
380. The King comes 387. IJ heartily with Q 
becauſe quia „% ut, utinam 39 
the Queen comes. the Queen would come. ter ſect 
381. The King will not come 388. So ita their 
for nam, enim the King comes Ft? 
the Queen comes not · 145 ut | 363 
May b 


| 
| 


= XII, An. Interjetions — Declines, 43 


af 


” 5 A 
'q | a 


F CHAP. xn. 


i 


ml 
7 Of an . 


jr 
W AT is an Interjection? 


Win | 
g 389. A. An Interjection is a Word which alone betokens 
© (me meaning of our mind; as, 


t of 


fl 0! ob! 51 wail-a-day ! wo! hed ' ve! 
0 M 9 cho! heus! phy ! pi ſb / my au! 
2 % behold ! en! ecce! huſh ! whiſt ! au, &c. 
N. B. The Interjections are moſily uſed to denote ſome fate paſſion of the 
4 wind, 


N. B. Thus have you learned the eight ſorts of Words uſed in ſpeaking, now 
ill me which of theſe words are Nouns, which Pronouns, eo hich Verbs, c 


© ti thou ] ſuavis ſweet ut | al 
ego z puer a boy | meus | mine 
Etremere to tremble tamen yet elle | „ 
phy! out upon't | sölus alone Fenn! 
temere raſbly mülier a woman hie  Sere 
contra againſt | arbor a tree | 


| 
currère 40 run 

| 

| 


CHAT MK | 


Concerning the Declining of M. ords: 


OV that you have ſeen the eightParts of Speech, you mul next learn 
which of them are declined, and which W therefore, 
Q. What is it to decline a Word? 
3090. A. To decline a Word is to turn it into divers endidgs, 
r WW Q. To what purpoſe is a Word fo turned into another ending ? 
\ WF 191. 4. A Word is turned into another ending to notify ſomething 
more to us than it did before, ſo that it not only ſignifies ft or /, but it 
aalignifies that, and ſomewhat further; as, 


homo a man homines nen 
puer 2 boy Dis turned into 4 pueri boys | 


muſa a ſong mũſæ ſongs 

N. B. 1. Some Words in declining do increaſe and ſome do * 2. Jo in- 
| Creaſe is to have more Syllables than it had before. 

& Q. May all forts of Words be fo declined into other endings # p 
| 392. 4, No Words that are Adverbs, Conjuntions, Prepoſitions, or In- 
le jections can be thus turned into other endings, but all ſuch Words keep 
| their firſt ending, and ſo are undeclined, as ſemel, et, ad, heu. 
Q Which Wordt then are they that be declined ? 


| | 
| 363. A. All Words that are Nouns, or Pronouns, or GL or Participles 
Wb be n 


| * * 

: * 

Y | 

- 3 | 

2 | 

. * | 


0% 


t 8 1.3. 


os . 
1 
we >: 7 1 — Iv 
—— — — —— 5 A LE. — 


7 
— — K x : - * 
. br Wa... 1 L — . x — — 22 
* n . in AY os tie. Air 


2 * 


matt 


46 Genders of Nouns. Chap. xy 


N.B. So thenC Nouns and four C Adverb. — P ha 
four ſorts ) Pronouns Care De- forts of YConjun@ions arel] IJ 
of Words, Yyerbs clined Morads, Se mea, Nee 
viz. Participles viz. and Interjections _ Wc! 
Q. Are all the declined Words declined after the ſame manner ? ec e 


3094. A. No; for Nouns, Pronouns and Participles are declin 0. 
manner, and Verbs are declined after another manner. 2 = * 


CHAP, I v3 
T he Declining of Nouns, Pronouns and Participli 'P 


Q. HY are Nauns, Pronouns and Par ticiples turned into other ending? 
; 395- A. Nouns, Pronouns and Participles are changed into: Q 
nother ending. | 18 

1. To adſignify the Gender, as agnus an he-/amb, agna, a ſbe land. Jy 


2. To adſigniſy the Number, as homo one man, homines more mz; wb 
3. To adſignify the Caſe, as homo a man, hominis of 2 man, & L | 
Which 
8. 1. Three Genders. 
Q. H many Genders are there? | | 400. 
396. A. As of things there be three kinds, 1. ſome males, 2. ſom 
Femadcs, 3. ſome veither males nor females. 


So of Words there are three forts, 1. ſome of the Maſculine Gende, 
2. ſome of the Feminine, z. ſome of the Neuter. 

N. B. And tbeſe have often different endings to diſtinguiſh then an fim 
anather, 3 0 
555 Mzſculine Gender . 


N. B. Per 4085 hic | 
1 7 the Feminine Gender 2 hæc “ 4 my - nf 
te Neuter Gender = hoc rem 0) 


$. Rules of the Genders of Subſtantives. 


Q. Which Words are of the Maſculine Gender? 
397. A. R. I. Every Subſtantive that ſignifies a male, is of the Mi 
culine Gender; as, 


hic mas a male : hic filius a fon Q. Hy 
hic vir 2 man hic ẽquus an horſe 102. 4 
hic Adamus Adam hic asinus an he- aſi a dingy 
hic Joannes Fobn hic agnus an he-lamb G. V 
hic magiſter a maſter hic Rex a King $403. 4 
hic piter a father hie pier a bey, x. , 

Q. Which Words are of the Feminine Gender? | R. 

398. A. R. II. Every Subſtantive that ſignities a female, is of the Ft Wes. 4 
minine Gender; as, | In one ; 
hæc femina a female hec Eva Ee RN. Of ; 
hc müller a woman hec Joanna Jean We Pla, 


1 


2 migiſtra 4 miſire/s Ihæc asina a ſve-aſs 

ee mater a mother hæc agna a 6 

Tec filia 4 daughter hæc Regina Ween 

ec ua a mare hæc puella a up. &c. 

. So there no Words of both the Maſculine and Feminine Gender? 
. 4. R. III. Every Subſtantive that ſignifies both the ale and 

" 92 is of the Common of two, that is, it is Soth of the Maſculine and 

of the Feminine Gender; as, 


* 


Tap XIV. Genders. Numbers. 47 


0 


Ie & hæc parens 4 parent hic & hzc heres an * 
þ ic & hæc iir à thief hic & hæc cuſtõs 4 keeper 
„e & hc dix 4 guide hic & hæc «ms an beg, &c. 
1 hic parens is an he-parent, or a father, hac parens 7s a ſhe -parent, 
„„ noiber, hic für an he-thief, hæc tar a ſhe-thief, &c. 
0% EQ Which Words are of the Neuter Gender? | 


. 4. Every Subſtantive that ſignifies neither nale nor ena! e ſhould 
f 5 the Meuter Gender, but * are not a//ſo; but ſome ſuch are of the 


1. ier, ſome of the Maſculine, ſome of the Feminine, and ſome Doubtful. 
ae may I in which be of the Neuter, hich of the Mairline and 
wich 'f the Feminine? A 
Maſculine 8 mM, | 
00. A. In the Vocabulary the eee V k | 
Subpantives 88870 5 | 
ſome Common 8 Je. | 
Doubtful S C. 
nder, 


F 1. Rules for the Genders of Aeris 


8 bo Of what Gender are Adjectives? 
401. A. All Words that are Adjectives are of all the three Gendes 


Ms: hic felix hic triſtis hic bonus 
| hec felix / or un- \ h&ctriſtis for un- Ihæc bona | 
ter- Jhoc felix I der hoc triſte \ der aoc bonum | 
ati hic vettis F tee; A hic ſuavis { rhree;Shic malus | 
5 a, Jizcvetus\ as, hæc ſuavis \ as, nec mala 
hoc vetus # hoc ſuave _hoc malum | 

eiu F. 2. Of the two Numbers. | 


Q How many Numbers are there ? | 
402. A. There be two Numbers, the Singular and the Plural. For on- 
Singular Number, and more than one is a Plural Number. | 


þ N Which Words are of the Singular Number? 
$03. 4. Thoſe Words are of the Singular Number which * but 
as, homo a man, puer a boy, mũſa a ſong. 
Q Which Words are of the Plural Number? 
the fe W404. 4. Thoſe Words are of the Plural Number which kgnif more 
Jene; as, homines men, N boys, mũſæ 4 55 
Q K of theſe Wards JOG which are of the Singular, and 2 «hich are 
Ive ve Plural ? 5 | 
he: | | | | torts 


4 a 
* 4 
C . 
5 
7 „ 
* 8 y 
1 
* 
4 Ly 
y 0 6; 
| 1 : 
1 
4 * 77 
198 
— 
Fab 
7 7 
1 
1 
N Fu 2 
13 
* * bY 
. 
+ 
4 


Cafes, Declenſions, Chap. Ny 


terra Find ſchöla 2 ſchool | diſcipuli ſcholars | porta 7 rate 
arma arms ſchöôölæ /chools diſcipulus a ſcholar | mœnla galley 


ings of every Caje in each Number. 


fourth, and ſome after the /h. 


F. 3. Of the Six Caſes, 

Q. How many Caſes are there? 
405. A. There be fx Caſes. 33 

the Nominative 7 the Accuſative Q 

the Genitive Ge the Yocative Caſe 

the Dative the Ablative C | | 
N. B. And the Caſes have different endings to diflinguiſh one from aum 
2. And to decline a Noun, Pronoun or Participle, is to give the right tl 


F. 4. Of the Five Declenſions. 


Q. How many ways are Nouns, Pronouns, and Participles declintd ? 
406. A. There are five ways of declining Nouns, Pronouns and Pat 
ples, which are called the five Dec/enfions. For ſome are declined i 
the firſ? way, ſome after the ſecond, ſome after the third, ſome after 


407. N. B. Here note theſe four things, that in every Declenfim 
1. The Vocative Singular is the ſame with the Nominative Singula 
2. The Vocative Plural is ever the ſame with the Nominative Plurl, 

3. The Ablative Plural is ever the ſame with the Dative Plural 
4. All Woras of the Neuter Gender have their Nominative, Ac" 
and Vocative alike in both Numbers, and in the Plural Number th!: 
Caſes end in a. : 


I. The firſt Declenſion. 2 

Q. HAT Words are of the firſt Declenſion? 
408. A. Words in à are of the firſt Declenſion. 
Q. How are they declined ? 


409. A. Words of the firſt Declenſion have their 


Nominative | os © Nominative * 


Genitive NE | Genitive 3 6s 
Dative of the Singular Je | Dative of the Plural Ju 
Accuſative Num ber in Nim | Arcuſative Number in esc 
Vecative 4 Vocative N& 128 
Ablative | | A Ablative | 1 
Q. Give me ſome Exæemples of Words thus declined ? | 
1 I 
NMhæc mul-a a /ong | N. muſ-æ ſong! A | 
Je. mul-z9f a ſong s muſ-irum I 
J. muſt to a ſong |= JD. muſs w/o We). 
SA. muſ- am the ſong * A. muſſãs ſongs PF |/ 
<c JV. o muſ à o ſong | | V. o muſ-z o ng ( 
Ab. mul-a by a ſong | Ab 


+. muſ-is dy op I $0: 


ll | Chap. XIV. The Second Declenſion. | if 


80 o decline 8 terra, umbra, natura, fortana, prũna, Se. 

he (NM hæc änim-a 4 /ou/ | NM. änim æ ſouls 

E \G. änim-æ of a ſoul GE. anim-arum of ful, 
D. änim-æ 70 4 ſoul D. anim-is 70 foals 
A. anim-am a ſoul A. anim-as forts 
V. o anim-a o foul i V. o anim- o /ouls 
Il. anim-a by a ſoul L Ab. anim-1s by ſouls 
7 o decline materia, beſtia, minera, femina, and all in 4. | 


| 


| 0 Are no Words of the firſt Dec lenſi on but thoſe that end ina? 
| 411. 4. Some few Words in äs, as Satinis, Lucas, Thomas are of this 
bit Declenſion, and make their Voc. Sing. in à long; as, | 


N. hic Satan is Satan 
6. Satan of Satan 
Satan-æ to Satan 


* n 
33 


Plural 


N. B. Words of the 507 Declenſion. 


D. 
$24 ſee, do not inireaſe 2 any 
. ' t 
: 0 One 1 ba _ Caſe ſave the Genitfoe Plaral. 


4b. Satan-a by on &c. | | 


| 
| 
1 


II. The Second Declenſion. | 


HICH Words are of the fecond Declenſion ? | 
| 412. A. All Words in am, and thoſe in er and us that are 
; Enarked | in the Vocabulary with 7 are of the Second Declenſion. 


"= 10. How are Words of the Second Declenſiun declined ? | 

thee 413. 4. Words of the Second Declenſion have their | 
un. us, Er or um | | Nom. & 1 but Neut. in 
ben. |. . I Gen. ; orum 
5, gtd Nam J © Det. (Numb . 
A. 8 8 um Acc. 5 ] 53 Neut. in a 
Ve. e er or Um Vac. : I, and Neut. ina 
65. 6 Al. Is | 


1 But here the Vocative Singular is not ever like the Nominative. 
| 414. A. Note, That when the Nominative in the Second Declenſion ends 
üs the Vocative Singular endeth in &, as hie Döminus a Lord, Voc. o 


al Jis {WOomint o Lord. Except Deus, o Deus; but f/ins and Proper Names i in 7:4 
lead of je have i, as o fili, Antonius, o Antoni, Georgius, 0 Georgi, 
: 2 Give me ſome Exemples of Words fo declined. | 


| 


415. A. I. Exemples of Words in ws. 


V hic münd-s the world N. miind-1 worlds 

„ mind-I of the rworld 1 &. mund orum gf worlds 
5 ) D. mün-dõ t the world S D. mund-ts to worlds 
ſongs A. mün-dũm 2he world 214. mund- õs rde 
gs . o mind & o the world „ o münd. o worlds 
nos N Ab, münd ö by the world Ab. mind Is by worlds. 
ſoy! & decline Deus, mödus, löcus, cryſtallus, ſapphirus, rub: in us, Cc. 


| 


y G Singular 


The Second Declenſion. Chap xj 


50 
FN. hicd6min-us a lord N. dömin-i /ords 
„6. domin-i of a lord _ 1 G6. domin-orum of ld. 
V a N 1 
= } D. domin-o 2 4 lord £ D. domin-Is 20 lord. 
BY 4 <comin-um /ord © } 4 domin 0s ra. 
©& V. o domin-e „ lord V. o doemin-1 o ord- 


Ab. domin-o by a lord 


So decline niimerus, angelus, änimus, and all in as marked (i), 


416. II. Words in er. 


N. hic puer a boy 
SIe. puer-iof a boy 
SE } D. puer-o to a boy 
BJ 4 puer-um 4 boy 
V. o puero by | 

Ab. Ppuer-o by a boy 


417. N. B. There are /ix Subſtantives that thus increaſe ſhort, puer, i 
ter, presbyter, s0ccr, gener ard vir viri, all the rift do not increaſe, t 


N. hic li- ber 2 hook 


Se. libri /a book 
S } D. lib-ro to a book 
SLY 4. lib-rum 4 book 
© | Y. o libèr o book 
Ab. lib-ro by a book 


So decline cancer, caper, äger, fiber, culter. 


N. hic magiſt-er a mafter 


Ab. 
So decline miniſter. 


N. B. Thus far the Accuſative Plural is different from the Menim ./ 
Plural, but in the ways of declining to come, the Accuſative Plural i 
ſame with the Nominative and Vocative Plural. 


418. III. Words in um. 


N. hoc regn-um a kingdom 
>= | G. regn-1 of 4 kingdom 
= JD. regn- o to a kingdom 
814. regn-um 4 kingdom 
[V. oregn-um o #ingdom 

Ah. regn-o by a hingdom 


So decline ſignum, ſpatium, membrum, and all in v7. 
N. B. For nihilum 77 the Nominative and Accuſative they of t Jay nihil | N 


III. Ti 


nil. And /o much for the ſecond Declenſion. 


x | G. magiſt ri of a maſter 
JD. magiſt-ro 7 a maſter 
54. magilt-rum a maſter 
&G V. o magiſt er maſter 


| 


magilt-ro by 4 maſter; 


Plural 


Plural 


Plural 


Plural 


Ab. dömin:-is by lords. 


f 

N. puer-i boys 
G. pur õrum of %% 
D. puer-Is to boys i 
A. puer 06s boys . de 
V. o pucr-i 0 boys 4 
Ab. Ppuer-Is by boys 4 
N. lib-ri books . 00 
G. lib rörum 6 bub WE, © 
D. lib-ris to books . Of 
A. lib-r6s buoks I 
V. olib-ri o books 7 
Ab. lib-ris by books L 

Q. 7 
N. magiſt- ri maſters f 
G. magilſt rõrum of n 2. 
D. magiſt ris to maßen Ne G 
A. magiſt ros maſter Wir 
LY. o magiſt- ri o maſters WW | G. 
Ab. magiſt-ris by mae D. 

14. 


1E/ 
0 B. 
. 
N. regn-a tingdoms . 
6. regn-orum vf : in;40088 al 11 
D. regn-1s 79 At Wo de: 
A. regn-i kingdom; bes (", 
V. o regn-i % Line don, ( 
Ab. Tregn-Is by King dum | 


ap. XIV. The Third Declenſion. | 3 


III. The Third Declenſion. 


HIC H Vords are declined after the third way? | 


in e, J. 3 and o | 
** in ar, or, ur and ut | 


fore it, and molt ending in er, es and un are of the third Declenſion. 
2 How are theſe tur ned into the right ending of every Caſe? 
bs A. Words of the Third Declenſion have their | 


i de, l, n, Se. | 3 Es, Neu. in 4 | 
[ (ihe Sin ”— An. +" "ning am or jum 
S ber in 1 Dat. 3 ibüs 
em or im Acc. es, and Næut. in 3 
& or i Ab. ibus 


5 Mil 


th A x Give me ſome Exemples of Woras fo declined. | 


21. 4 Here follow Exemples of three ſorts; | 

g. Of Words that do not increaſe in the Genit. as mare miris, 

2. Of Words that increaſe with the laſt Sy]. but one long, as virtũs, virtũtis. 
P Of Words that increaſe with that Syllable ſhort, as lapis, lapidis. 


ſ 


| 


I. Exemples of Words not mcreaft ing. | 


iQ Ke Phi Wards in the third Declenſion do not increaſe in the G enitive 
he. ar 


122. A. All Words ending in e, and moſt in &s and is do not Lo 


Jeri ſhe Genitive Singular, and theſe make the Genitive Plural in ium. 

f hoc ret-e 2 net | N. ret-ia nets | 

16. ret-is of net G. ret-ium of nets 

en D. ret-i to 4 net J) D. ret-ibus fo nets 
A. ret-e à net EZ \ Ac. ret-ia wets | 

viral V. oret-e o net X V. o ret. ia o nets | 

4 1 ret-1 by 4 nei Abl. ret-Ibus by nets 


B. Inſtead of late in the Nom. Accuſ. and Voc. they uſe lac, but no Plur. 
1 Bu hers the Ablative does not end in e as it ſhould do. | 
123. 4. Neuters in £ make the Ablative in i, and the Nominative 


di 

agua ral in 79. 

2 50 decline mare, altire, and all in e. | 

 W{ Ybuc nab-cs NM. -es|3.6 ( N. hæc peſt-i| FN. F 

mt 6. -1s G. ium 1 G. ie 1G. | um 

740mm D {8 1 — 18 Ba 

WS D. ibu] D. IIS JD. | -ibus 

n1hil a V. es F. a FE ia V 
Ab, & Ab. ibus Ab. e Ab. | Abus 


5 I =E vuipes, fämés, sẽdés, finis, poſtis, pins, collis. 2 


8 18 


in as, is, 05 and with a Conſonant be- 


: 
W "3.44. et kt * 5 
— * 7 Do? 


P 


* 


„„. erer — — 


-.4 
« 
* 
{ 
þ 
* 
Oo 
i, 
4 
4 


So decline col-or -oris, anim al -alis, ver veris, ſt-ãs · ãtis, tell. d 


32 The Fourth Declenſion, Chap. xy 

424. II. Exemples of Words that increaſe long. , 

N&? N.&? - N.& N. & q 

\r. cal-or =Y © res 8 Ferre =? 8 a 
1a. -örisf S G. rum )] G. - onis| S 16. ii 

DH - -|J 77 8 I | 

.= D. 2 D. -or1bus S D. -n By D. *Oniby . 
Ac. -orem Ac. Gres Ac. <onem * "4 ! 
As. e Ab. öribus! Ab. -6ne\ M0; ow 1 Q 
43 


leo le-onis, lig- O- onis, mos moris, adam-as -antis, c. 


So decline ge-nus -Eris, cip-ut - itis, pond-Uus · &ris, alam-en inis, G 


2 
fourth Declenſio 


425. III 
$49 ** hic lä. pis 2 Tides 

E158 1 2 
JV 1} &. Idi S] G. -1dum 
2D. -idiſS J D. -idibus 
Ae. idem Ac. -ides 

45. ide ( 28. -idibus! 

N pyoc * cõrp-· Gra 
> | 4. >corp-us|_ A. _—_ 
S JJ. I à body JV. 
LY) G. corp- oris Q G. corp-orum 
[D. corp-ori D.corp-6ribus 

A.c6r-p-ore| A.corp-oribus 


S ingular 


| 


OY 9 mil-Es 2 ſoldier 


mil-1tts of a ſoldirr 
mil iti z9 4 ſoldier 
mil- item a ſoldier 
mil- ite by a ſolditr, l 
So decline paſser is, jud-ex - icis, ord- o- inis, virg- O- inis, &. 


. Excmples of words increaſing ſhort. 


Y A. n0-men L 

Q F. 

JJ. Ia name> 

— 0 > 

5 1. Inis 
2 D. -In! 
Ab. Ine 


IV. The Fourth Declenſion. 


N. 


Q. Hoc are the Words in us declined ? 


42 7 : 
Nom us 
(3 21} = us 
Dat. | 5 Ut 
Acc. Bo THY 
7 — wy 
4 Ol. 55 ul 3 
| X 5 
Aol. u 


A. Words in x have their 


Nom. us 
Gen. | = \ äum 
Dat. | I lous 8 
=_ = us . 
V5 oc. üs 


N. hic früctùs 


G. fruͤctũs 
D. früctüi 
A. früdüm 
J. o fruttys 
Ao. früctũ 


HIC H Werd are declined after the fourth way ? 
426. A. All Subſtantives in u, and many in Us are oi t 


Plural 


So decline ſpirits, lacis, and all in us marked (us). 
He are Mord in u decline? 


428. A. Words in « in the Singular have all gheir Caſes in 4, att 
the Plural have the N. J. At. in va, G. in uum, D. and 4. in ibus. 
So decline genu and cornu. : 


. mam 3 — EID> 668 
J. . g 
G. «+I. \- 
D. ih) 


* n 
- = 
— 8 1 


HY <7 


© « 


a a ; Fo 8 N 25 FI 2 Le 2 5 * 
cd > 
we 
+3 


N. ſrud 
G. frudut G 
D. frudid 
A. frud 
8 frat ; 
Ab. fräi 
N. 
EQ. 
FDecle 
13 


V. I 


. Chap. XIV. ; Tho Fifth Declenſton. - 0 


V. The Fifth Declenſion. | 


Fr | : 

* H 4 oH Words are of the Fifth Declenſion? 

bu A Res, ſpes, and hides faith, and moſt Subſtantive in 

uy i are of 4 F ifth Declenſion. 

by 'L How are the Words of the Fifth Declenfion declined in all 2 * 

au 430. 4. Words of the Fifth Declenſion have their | 

* F Es [N. 7 | N. hæc faci-cs N. Es 
F. . tilfc. 8 es | G. faci-ëi | | G. rum 
Pp. [Z) eib. 2 J) D. faciti|S JD. bus 
. ( I em 3 E trum S Ae. faei- Em \ 4c: -ES 
W.\1.< | cs}D. 1. =bus |? J. o faci-&s e 

| . 1 th | 46. facie 45, -ebus 

“vo decline dies, acies, and res, ſpes, fides, but theſe three make ri 

r 


5 fidéi, ſhort in the Genitive and Dative Singular. | 


Mer give me the endings of every Caſe in every Declenſion. | 
f 431. A. The Endings of every Caſe in every Declen ſion. 


1 | I De. | IT. Dec. | III. Declenſion. 1 V. D. 
ON Nom. z, as | ds, er, m] e, j n, o, ir, or, ür, üt, is, i, ös, Ge. üs, u ſẽs 
in. Voc. | 4, à E, Er, um| e, I, n, o, ar, or, ur, ut, as, is, os, Fc. | us, u és 
-lnth : Gen * 1 13 us, u E1 
n= \ Da. # 6 | I ui, u [fei 
is, 6 2 | Acc. | im | tim ; Em or im üm, u em 
Abl.] a 6 & or i u, qu fe 
Mm.] æ ji N. a es N. à or ia | ũs, ua Es 
C es N. à or ia üs, un [Es 
Gen. |arum | orum um or lum üum {erum 
i at; 18 T8 ; Ibus ibus Ebus 
| Acc.] 5s [os Na &s N.4 or ia us, ua Fes 
| ABI. | Is [Is 1bus libus JEbus 


Q How then ſhall we know of which Declenfiou any word is? 
| 432. A. By the ending of each Caſe, but eſpecially by the ending of 
þ: Genitive Singular; thus 


* Firſt | 


ſrud 
rudtün 
frudd 


{ru E 1 in the Genit. \ Second 
„ © ee i, C Singular is J Third & Declenſion 
frudiu us of the Fourth | 


El Fifth | 
N. B. Now go back and tell me what Declenſion every Nun Subantive i 15 of. 
| Q. Are all Nouns, Pronouns and Participles declined after one 1 Five 


preg 40? 


| #55 A. There are three Pronouns, ego, tu, ſui, otherwiſe dedlibed} thus, 
| Sin- 


—— 


1, Ad! 
bus. 


V. I 


Declining of Adjectives. Chap. XIy 


by hong ff - | (Now. nos we — [Cha 
S | Sex. mei of me — \ Gen. noſtrum or noſtri — 
8, Dat. mihi 10 me S Dat. nobis zo 4s Fa „ 
— | Acc. m2 me . Acc. nos {us F 
Abl. me by me Abl. nöbis by us E 
| Nom. tu thou or you | Nom. vos ye or you | . 
S | Gen. tui of thee V \ Gen. veſtrum or veſtri fu x 
1] Dat. tibi to thee J Dat. vobis zo you =) 
Acc. te thee Acc. vos ye or you Fol 
© | Yu. o tu o thou Voc. o vos oye © | 
Abl. te by thee Abl. vöbis by you 80 
Nom. —— Nom. N. 
E \ Gen. ſui of ones ſelf Ie. ſui of themſelves | So 
$4 Dat. tbl zo ones ſelf & < Dat. fibi to themſelves bbigra 
S Acc. fe ones ſelf Q | Acc. ſe themſelves . 
Abl. ſe by ones elf Abl. fe by themſelves 157 
34. N. B. Tot, quot, quatuor, c. ſee number 226.) are not declined s MM ug 
all, and ſatis, nimis and cras are uſed only in the Nom. and Accuſ. Singu, MW 
And mane in the Nom. Acc. and Abl. Singular. 
| 3 - ( 
„ The Declining of Adjectives. 
| / 
Q. Are all Aajedtives declined after one of theſe five Declenſions ? } 


35. A. All Adjectives are declined after the Firſt and Second Declet 
fion, or after the Third, | | 
Q What Adjectives are of the Firſt and Second Declenſion ? 
36. A. Adjectives in us, a, um, and er, a, um, are of the Firſt and 
Second Declenſion, and be thus declined, all three Genders together, 


 Adjetives of the Firſt and Second Declenſion 


IT. In us a um. 


h 

mM. u. mM. ; 2 * 

NM. bonus bona bonum MN. F boni bona bona G 

» | G. boni bonæ boni . \ bonorum bonirum bonorun D 
J) D. bono bonæ bono JD. ] bonis bonis bonis 4 
A. bonum bonam bonum I A. ] bonos bonãs bona V. 
. bone bona bonum V. | boni bonæ bom 114 
Ab. bono bona bono | A. ( bonis bonis bons WW ew 
N. B. Where ys: he the Maſc. and Neut. are of the Second, and theFen Ws | G 
of tbe Firſt Declenſon. SD 
So decline malus, probus, and all in us (except vetus) and Participles ins 2714 
4 amand us-a- um, mat us-a-um, gt meus mea meum hath in the V ocatiie 
0 


bing. mi mea meum, a for ſaturus they w/e ſatur -a um. : 
II. 4 


XIV. Declining of Adjectives. | "on 


. II. Aajectives in er Era erum. | 

E mM. H. u. m. 55 „ 

” CN. liber era -ecrum . lib-ert Er | -Era 

E 1G. cri Fræ -Eri | 1 G. -erorum _ e rõtum 
„0D. sro -cre ro > JD. Eris = -Erls |-Er18 

ANA. -crum -cram -crum & T. ros -eras | -Era 

= 7. x ·˙ = J. Eri Era Era 

666. Fro Fra -cro | Ab. Eris -Eris Eri 


So decline proſper, miſer, aſper, tener, dexter, ſiniſter, lacer and cæter. 
N. B. But ſome caſt off the ſhort e, and make er ra rum, ri ræ ri, &c. 

So decline niger, pulcer, ruber, ſacer, æger, macer, piger; thus niger 
nigra nigrum, G. nigri nigræ nigri, &c. | | 
. Are all Adjefives in us a um, and er a um thus declined? | 
E 437.4. There are certain Adjectives of another manner of declining in 
Etro Caſes, for they make the Gen. Sing. in ius, the Dat. in i, which be theſe 


ot 


/ : ne that follow, unus, tötus, ſölus, ullus, nullus, altus, alter, uter, neuter, 
"i m. ++ u. | ö 
„NM. un-us a um So decline totus, ſolus, ullus and 
IG. ius ius - ius nullus; but alius alia aliud à little 
= JD. -1 1 1 otherwiſe, thus 
\ 4. um am um M ali-us 4 ud 
JJ. e a -um Sing. G. al-lus sius -1us 
WM (4 0 | + 0, &6 | D: alii4 _ a 
$ „ u. . 2 
= CN. alter altera alterum N. uter utra utrum 
and WW. | G. alter-1us ius ius > JG. utrius utrius utrius 
r ) D. alterji 1 -1 S JD. vtri utri utri 
F.. aiter-um am um by Ac. utrum utram utrum, Se. 
. alter 22 um © Fo decline neuter. | 
(4. alter.o a -0, c. | 


Q Are there any more Adjefives befilles theſe nine ſo decline? 

438. 4. Theſe Pronouns ille, ipſe, iſte, hic, is, qui, quis and quid have 
Alo their Genitive Singular in ius, and their Dative in i. | 
pf 


N. We illa illud iſte iſta iſtud } ipſe ipſum 
| C. illius illius illius iſtius iſtius iſtius ipſius ipſius ipſiuꝰ 
run D. mi Nn iſti iſti iſti ipſi ipſi ipſi 
N 2 illum illam illud iſtum iſtam iſtum | ipſum iplam ipſum 
] db. illo illa illo, . | iſto iſta iſto iplo, Se. 

N. bie hec hoe 7515 N. hi ha | hec 
en: E. hajus hujus hujus 3 horum hirum horum 

D. huic huic huic D. his his | his 
11 Us Ac, hunc hanc h6c J Ac. hos his | hec 
cative V. — M V. — — | 

4b. hoc his hoc | Ab, this his | his 


All. 


Singular 


1 
A 
1 
j 
1 


Q 
ON 


Declining of Adjectives. Chap. x1 


1 ta a "X44 ez en 
s. ẽjus Ejus ejus 8 G. eõrum earum egrym 
2D. Ei el ei & . eis or iis eis or iis eis gr in 
BY Ac. | cum em id I 2. cs ey e k 
GY. —— J. — Dc” F 

Ab. cõ ea 1 Ab. eis or iis, &e. KH 

N. idem eidem idem | N, idem exdem eidem ; 
« \ G. cjuſdem ẽjuſdem ẽjuſdemſ | C. eõrũndem eirindem eõründen WM 
D. eidem eĩdem eidem S D. eiſdem or iiſdem, c. 80 
i Ac.eundem eandem idem S Ac. eõſdem eãſdem eidem N.4 
3 . idem cadem idem V. idem exdem eidem Es 

LA. eõdem eãdem eödem Ab. ei ſdem or iiſdem, &c. x | 

N. qui quæ quod | N qui que quæ 8 
x | &. cajas cujus cujus | | G. quorum quiarum quirun Wi; | 
D. cui cul cut | $ JD. quibus or quis, c. ET. 
BY) Ac. quem quam quod ] Z.. quos quis que 
2 J. 2 

Ab. quo qua quo Ab. quibus quibus quibus 

or qui qui qui or quis quis quis h 

So decline quidam quædam quoddam, G. cujuſdam. Qc. and quis que ! 
quod, G. cujus, &c. and quid, G. cujus, D. cui, Ac. quid, &. 200 
Q. Are there yet no more Adjeftive: otherwiſe declined ? &) L 

39. A. There are two more Adjectives yet, ambo Soth, and duo / 
which becauſe they always betoken more than one, therefore want . ( 


Singalar Number, and in the Plural are thus declined, 


Ki . 2 m. EG 


| 443: 

5 C:mbo -© -0 Jo . odio duz duo Flur. 4% 

K JG. -orum -irum -orum V G. duorumduirum duorun 1 
2 D. öbus abus obus S \ D. duobus duibus duibus f 

A. -0s -3S -0 % | 4. duds duis duo 

Ab. -obus -abus -obus | Ab. duobus duibus dudous 1 

"TW : 7 

Adjectives of the Third Declenſion. 8 

\ | D. 

Q. Which Adjefives are of the Third Declenſion? | Ac 

440. A. All that are not of the Firſt and Second are of the Tir Al 

and theſe are of three ſorts. 90 de 

N | | huper - 

E N.B. 


I. Adjectives not increafing. 


Q. What Adjz&ives do not increaſe in the Genitive Singular? 
441. 4. AdjeRives in is -i5-e, and in er -ris re do not increaſes * 


tp 


mn 


Third; 


S. 7g ee l ” 
J 


| 
| 
j 
N. . Fe . | Ms. 1 2 


Chap. XIV. Declining of Adjectives. 87 
V. triſt-is is e NM. triſt- es ges ia 
G. * * um -jum -jum 
b D. „ , Þ 44 590. -Ibus Abus bus 
14. -em em e. 6 ia 
1, is is e PF -CS 12 ia 
4b. -1 -1 1 Ab. bus us 1bus 
$ decline qualis talis, ſimilis, utilis, and all Adjectives in is, and Plural 
V. A. V. tres tres tria, G. trium, D. and Ab. tribus. | 
i IN. acer gers dere NV. acres acres acria 
G. acris . acris acris G. acrium acrium acrium 


D. acri acri acri D. äcribus äcribus icribus 
acrem acrem acre Ac. acres acres acria 
F. acer acris acre J. acres acres acria 


Plural 


. ei - en Ab. icribus icribus actibus 
442. II. Adjeaives increaſing long. | 
2 J. 2 2 of u. 
KF... W⁵ÿNZ N. | | 
N . Feli fin [ IA. >felices felices felicia 
8 G. felicis felicis felicis MED 7 | 
WD. felici felici felici = p felicicium ſelicium, Sc. 
Ac. felicem felicem felix 
Ab. felice or ſelici, c. | {elictbus felicibus, Se. 


do decline cujae, noſtras, veſtras -atis, vehemens, ſapiens, ſrequens -entis» 
10 Participles in ans and ens, as amans - antis, docens -entis. 
| 443. N. B. Hoc plus 75 Subſtantire in the Sing. and an Adjefive in the 
Pur. declined thus, bg. N. A. Voc. hoc plus, E. pluris, D. pluri, Ab. plure 
br pluri. P/ur. N. Ac. V. . plures plures plura or pluria, G. plurium, D. and 
6. pluribus. ons 


444. III. Adjectives increaſing foort, | Th : 


« VEteri, Cc. G. vceterum, &t. 


mM. + 1. mn. „ 
, Fell, vetus vetus N. | | | 
V. Ac. Sveteres eteres vetcra 
GC. veteris, Cc. J. | 
D 
A 


Plural 


6. vetcrem vetcrem vetus 


2 2 vetéribus a 
Ab. vetcre or veteii, c. 3 I ; S5 


80 decline par paris and impar impäris, hebe Es he betis, dives divities 
Juper is, only they make the Nom. Plural ia, the Gen. ium. 
NB. Now turn back to the C hapter of Adject. and decline br one right. 


d. Three Degrees of nnn 


| 
F 


by fre theſe all the zeays that Adjefives are turned into other endings ? 
545, 4. Some Adjectives are yet turned into other endings in ier, and 
u, to make compariſon between things, as that one thing is u,, ano- 


| ther 


1 1 
i 
9 N 
1 
ol 
5 * 
1 | - 
— I L 
i 3h 
4 1 
% Tl : 
_ 14 
3 - F 
= 1 
1 
+' 18 
N 
41 
[ 
7 
„ 1 
" © 2 
1 
* > „ 
: » 
ry + B 
* 1 4 * 
® . 3 
. 
11 
» y 
2 ' 
- * SF 
q ? 
1 * 7 * 
. 1 | 
> * 
— 4 
F | 
71 . 
4 
3 +323 
Iz _— 
Sf 4 . 
” | 
4 : 
. 
1 
” fl 
bl N 
# ö f 
4 iS 
' 
* LS 
** 11 
44 . 
: 
0 
Y x 
. 5 
* 
£4 
* | Fe 
'T LI 
11 
* * « 
- F* 
0] 
x 
. 
\ 
1 bt 
4 
} 
"3% 
4 
7 
14 
7 


4 

: 
+ 
* 
1 
y 
[ 
| 
% 
| þ 


58 Comparing of. Adjectives. Chap. xy 


ther is more ſuch, another is moſt ſuch ; ſo of three hard things, one is harl 


another is more hard, a third is hardeſt of all. 7 
Q. How many Degrees of Compariſon are there ? FF) 
436. A. There are three Degrees of Compariſon ; the Poſitive Dezw 7 

the Comparative, and the Superlative. N be 

QQ Shew me the nature of each of theſe, and how they differ. | mM: 

47. 4. An Adjective of | m⸗ 

1. The Poſitive Degree betokens a thing to be ſimply ſuch, as dur hu Pa. 

2. The Comparative betokens it to be more ſuch, as durior har; m 

more hard. ' F mu 

3. The Superlative betokens it to be 2297 ſuch, as duriſſimus hard mu 

moſt hard. N. 

N. B. All the Adjectives that you have hitherto heard of are f the Poſfmad . 

Degree, and now from it you muſt learn to form the Comparative ad 450 

Snperlative. Abus; 
Q May all Adjectives form Degrees of Compariſon ? | 

448. A. No; tor only thoſe Adjectives by which we may ſay onethi I 

is ſuch, another is more ſucb, and another is mo/? ſuch, may form Cimpurij } 

But thoſe by which we cannot ſay one is /uch, another more ſuch, ) 

another 29 ſuch, cannot form Compariſen ; as omnis all, unus ont, ing ) L 

three ones, we cannot ſay, one is one, another more one, and another / 

one, Cc. A 

Q. How are the Comparative and Superlative Degrees formed fun II. 
Poſitive ? | 


49. A. The Poſitive is to be declined to the Ablative Singular, u 
then the 44% Vowel of that bl. Caſe is to be turned into 
| * for the Comparative, 
i//imus for the Superlative. So 


Poſitive Comparative Superlative. 
durus Hard, Ab. dur-o dur-1or harder dur-iſſimus hari 
triſtis /d Ab. triſt-1 | triſt-10r /adder triſt iĩſſimus av 
felix happy Ab. felic-e felic-1or happier felic- iſſimus happii} 

Q. Are all thus compared? 

450. A. No; there are three Exceptions. | 

451. I. If the Poſitive end in er the Superlative is formed from 
putting to it rimus (but the Comparative is right) as | 


Pai. Comp. Superl. 8 
pũlcer pulcrior pulcerrimus fair fairer fair 
tener tenerior tenerrlmus tender tenderer ten! 


Q. Which is the ſecond Exception? | 
45 2. A. II. Five Words ending in /is make the Superlative by ciil 


ing Jig into /imns, as, I 

Po. Comp. Superl. 6b. 
hümilis humilior humillimus humble more. nm . Th 
simimilis fimilior ſimillimus like liker likef does, 
diſcimilis difimilior difimillimus an/ke— nor... I. 
ficilis facilior facillimus enfie eaſier edit r A. 


difticiis difficicilior difficillimus aificult 6 


Chap. XV. Declining of Uerbs. | 59 
| "Q Which is the third Exception ? | | 
453. 4. From the General Rule are excepted theſe that follow, 
50, Comp. Superl. | 
bonus melior optimus good better beſt 
| malus pejor peſs1mus bad 2007 ſe worſt of all 
| magnus major maximus great greater greateſt 
parvus minor minimus little leſs leaſt of all 
 multus — plur1mus | 
"OE nul ——— - plurima much more moſt 
E multum plus plurimum | | 


N. B. Now turn again to the Chapter of Adjectives, and compare them. 
Q How are Comparatives and Superiatives declined ? | 
154. A. I. The Comparatives are all declined in the third Declenſion, 


thus; | 
| Mm. . u. m. 3 1. 


N quri-or duri-or duri-us | * FR 4 
ai © ; : Ac. >-ores -Ores -ora 
h, a K 1G, -oris - Orls -Or1s F. | 


Plural 


D. -ori -Or1 - Ori G. -orum -orum -orum 
Ar, -orem -orem sus | | 


D. 3 | 
4b. -ore or -0ri, Ce. 4. $-oribus, 80 
II. Superlati ves are declined like bonus, as duriflimus-a-um, G. i- · i, c. 


CHAT A, | 
The Declining of Verbs. | 


| 

Lf HUS you have learned to decline Nouns, Pronouns and Participles, 
| now tell me, Why are Verbs declined into other endings? 

1455. 4. The Verbs ſet down in Chap. VII. ſignifie barely ys be or to 
cw to do or to have done, &c. And are Infinite, i. e. not confined to 
Ie Perſon. | 

but now they are to be declined into other endings to ad/ignify 

The Mood or manner that we uſe them in, © And ſo they become F- 
The Time when a thing 7s, or daes, or fers, ( nite, i. e. confined to one 
The Number of them that Se, do, or /»fer, ( perſon, of one number, of 
. The Perſon that is, does, or ſuffers, one T'ime, of one Mood. 


§. 1, Three Moods. 


BY How many Moods or Manners in which ae uſe Verbs are there ? 
15b. 4. Beſides the {rn finite there be Three Moods. | 

l. The Indicative Mood, which we uſe when we declare that ſomething 
does, or ſuffers, as cœno 7 Jap, or J do ſup. | 

II. The Imperative Mood, which we uſe when we bid ſomething to be, 
do, or to ſuffer, as cœna / thor. „ | 

II. The Subjunctive Mood, which we uſe to fabjoin to another V erb with 


lat, if, Sc. between them, as Velle ut cœnem, 79 dehre that I ſup. 
H-3 | N. 


fort 
er nl 


Tun | 


ar, a 


- 4 
.<. 
_ EEC ͤ ˙¹·-w! ̃ u ay 0” 1 E SA 
8 N "9 2 — — r T + 4464 12 _ 4 
n 2 n 


. 
"Ra * —— on 


8 


— — 
8 


— 
2 N 
i 004 2 


= 2" * * J 
* c : 
: . 
8 D - * 4 
L 2 0 + 
— ———— — ll — 8 — — ao 
r =... pe- — — p Fo p 
: - — res : 
* ts — 2 —ů ů 5 BS 
a - — * _ 


7 
— EE oe ado He 


——_—— r 


7 en * 
n - T 


— mf — 2 


— - - 


A 


60 Declining of Uerbs. Chap. Ny. 


N. B. The Sabjundtive Mead is ſometimes engliſbed by may, might, ca 
could, would or thould. | £ | ; 
N. B. Theje Moods muſt have different endings to diſtinguiſh one from amthy 


'$. 2, Twice-Three Times or Tenſes. 4 
Q. How many Times are there herein one is, ar does, or ſuffers? | 5 | 
457. 4. There be Three Times or Tenſes. Ab 
I. The Preſent Time, that now is. 

II. The Preter Time, that is paſt. 1 
III. The Future Time, that is yet to come. = |: 
N. B. So ſome endings are of the Preſent Tenſe, ſome of the Preter, ani ſm 27 

of the Future, and theſe are different to diſtinguiſb one Time from anther, | 4 

But you ſaid above, that there were T wice-three Ten/cs. on: 
458. A. Yes, becauſe (as you heard Ch. VII. 5. 6.) ſome Verbs fignife Q 

Imperfettly to be a doing, as cœnare to ſup or 10 be at ſupper, and others Py. 4 

Fectly to have done it, as cœnaviſſe ro have ſupped; therefore there are Tait: 

three Tenſes, three of the Inperfect, and three of the Perfect. 

1. The Pre/ent of the Imper fett, as cœno 7 ſip, or am at ſupper non, 
but have not yet done it. 
2. The Preter of the Inperfect, as cœnãbam I was at ſupper then, but 

had not done it. 

3. The Future of the Imperfed, as ccœnãbo I ſhall ſup, or ſhall be at [i 2 

per hereafter, but not that I ſhall have done it. | 40 

4. The Preſent of the Perfect, as cœnävi I have ſupped, and it is nau du the! 


5. The Preter of the Perfect, as coniviram I had then ſupped, and it w 
then dons, | | 

6. The Future of the Perfect, as coxnavero I ſhall have ſupped, and ili 
have done it. 

N. B. 1. The Preſent of the Perfect is commonly called the Preter-purfih 

2. Aud the Preter of the Perfect is commonly called the Preter-pla-perfih 


§. 3. Two Numbers, Singular and Plural, 


Hos many Numbers are there ? | 
459. 4. There are Ts Numbers, the Singular and the Plural, and 
tome endings of Verbs are of the Singular and ſome of the Plural, as Sing 
Ego cceno I jup, Pla. nos cenamus ce ſup. = . 

And thoje endings are different to diſtinguiſb the Singaiar from the Pura. 


F. 4. Three Perſons, 


Hoco many Perſons are there? | 
oh A. There be Three Perſons; the Firſt, the Second and the Thin 


I. The Firſt Perſon is that which ſpeaketh of it ſelf, as Ego 4, 008% 
TI. The Second Perſon is that which is ſpoken to, as Tu {hot vos þ 
III. The Third Perſon is that which neither ſpeaketh of it ſelf, no! 
ſpoken to, but is ſpaken of, as ille ve, illi hey, &c. 10 


| Chap. XV. Declining of Uerbs, -. 
And accordingly ſome endings of Verbs are o 
| The Firſt Perſon, as, ego cœno [ /up, nos eœnãmus we ab. 

| The Second Perſon, as, tu cœnas tou uppeſt, vos cœnãtis ye ſup. 

| The Third Perſon, as, ille cœnat he ſups, illi ecenant vey ſap. 

And theſe Endings muſt be different to diſtinguiſh one Perjanjfow the other; 


g. 5. The Conjugating of Verbs, or curning Infinite 
Verbs into Finite. 


| N. As before you learned to decline a Noun in all its Caſes, ” now you muſt 
earn to Conjugate or Decline a Verb in all its Perſons, Wh al is it then to 
unjugate 4. Verb 
461. 4. To Conjugate a Verb, is to give the right ending of every Per- 
ſon in each Number, of every Tenſe, of every Mood. | 
Q. How ſhall that be learned? 
462. A. You "_ _ now to conjugate 
rbs in 7 
FY 8 in 1 which fignify Imperſektiy 


3. Verbs in 7 which ſignify Perfectly. 


F. 6. Four Conjugations of Verbs in ve. 


Q. How many ways are Verbs in re declined ? 
463. 4. There are four ways of declining Verbs in re, which are called 
the Four Conjugations ; for — 
are are of the Firſt | 
. Jre are of the Second 33 
Verbs in & re are of the Third NY 
Ire are of the Fourth | 
Q. What mark then hath every Conjugation to know it by ? 
64.4 Firſt Conjugation have a long before re, as amare, 
Ry Second Conjugation have & long before re, as docere. 
bf the Third Conjugation have & ſhort before re, as legere. 
Fourth Conjugation have i long before re, as * 


| 
| 


and! I. The Firft Conjugation in are. 


25 Him are 1 in are declined into Finite? | | 


9 0 as At P 
„ abam ibas ibat 


+0 P. ibamus ibatis àbant in the Pret. [mp. 
Thu b 40 abis abit P 
R. 


P. abimus abitis abunt zz the Fut. Imperf. 
nos v 0 10r ito to P. ite or itote anto in the Fut. Inperat. 
WT. em Es Ct ?, emus Etis ent ix the Pre/. Imperf.' 
„, no! d irem arcs iret P. ircmus iretis arent in the Pret. Imp. >Subjunttive 
P | 


Tr . Emus Etis ent z tbe Tut. Imp. 
At N. B. 


„ 
, " 
_ PP ²˙ wmÄ anime 
de® + 1.1 — 
N 


3 
amus ätis ant in TY Pref. Os | 
Fudicative 


— I 1 * 8 _ — 
— —— R vali 
- - 


— — pg 5 
4 1 4 2 
—— r p 
7 N 2222 


Fr 
y — 2 | wo 

oo > <P, N — * 
= oo tb . z 


s 1 
2 — * — * 
. 


62. Declining of Uerbs, 


Pref. Tenſe S. amo amis amat P. amimus amitis aman; 
I love thou lopeſt he loveth we love ye love they hy, 
Pret. Imp. S. amabam amabas amiabat P. amibamus amiabitis amibant 
T did love or was a loving, thou didſt, &c. 
Fit. Tenſe S. amãbo amibis amibit P. amabimus amibitis amihunt 
T ſhall love or I will love, thou, &c. 
2. In the Imperative Mood. 
Ert. S. ami or amãto amãto P. amãte or amitote amanto 
love thou let him love love ye let them In 
N. B. In the Imperative there is no Preſ. nor Prei. becauſe we can bid mly 


for the time to tome, and there is no fir Perſon, becauſe none bids hinſilf, | 


faying love I, but love tho. 

3. In the Subjunctive Mood. 
Preſ. S. Si amem ames amet P. amẽmus amèétis ament 
| V love if thou love if he love if we love if ye love if they lin 
Pret. Imp. S. Si amirem amires amiret P. amärẽmus amirctis amirent 

if I loved, if I were a loving. 
Fut. S. Si amem ames amct, Sc. like the Preſ. 
| if I ſhall love 
Co decline vacire, creare, formaire, mutire, errire, and all in ire. 


II. The Second Conjugation in ere. 


Q. How are Verbs in ee turned into Finite? 

467. A. Verbs in & re are turned into the right endings of every Per- 
ſon by changing ere into | 
S. Fo Es. ct P. Emus Etis ent in the Perf. 

S. ebam Ebas bat P. ebamus ebatis Ebant iz the Prez. Imp. 
S. Ebo ᷑bis ebit P. ebimus eEbitis Cbunt ix the Fut. 


Indicative 


S. — ẽ or Eto Eto P. c te or tote ento in the Fut. of the Imperative. | 


§. Fam cas Eat P. eamus eatis eant in the Pre/. 
S. Erem Eres eret P. ercmuserEtis Eret i the Pret. Imp. >Subjunditt 
S. Eam eas, /ike the Pref. in the Fut. 
Q. Give me an Eremple of a Verb in ere thas conjugated ? 
468. A. Docere 10 teach is formed thus: 
1. In the Indicative Mood. 
Preſ. S. docco doces docct f?. docemus docetis docent 


I teach thou teacheſt he teaches woe teach ye teach they tea! 
Pret. Imp. S. docẽbam docebas docebat. B. docibamus docebatis docebant 
| T was a teaching, thou waſt, &c. 
Fut. $, docẽbo docevis docibit P. docẽbimus docebitis doccbunt 
I will teach, thoz wilt, &c. | 


2, In 


Chap. xv. 


N. B. The Future of the Sub junctive is ever the ſam? with the Prof. $4; 
Q. Give me an Eremple of Verbs in ire thus varied? PEW 
466. A. Amire 79 love, which is thus formed. 

1. In the Indicative Mood. 


ve | 


9 | 


oe | 


| Chap. XV. 


| ©. dccẽ or docẽto doceto 


Preſ. S. lego legis legit 


| Fu. S. legam leges leget P. legemus legetis legent. 


Declining of Uerbs. 


2. In the Imperative Mood. 


n 


—— . —üäö4Vũäͤ— —_—_ 


?. docæte or docẽtote docento, 
teach thou let him teach teach ye let them teach. 


z. In the Subjunctive Mood. 


| 
| Preſ. & Fut. S. ſi doceam doceas doceat P. doceamus doceatis doceant, 


l teach, &c. 


| Pret. [mp. S. ut docerem doceres doceret P. docẽrẽmus docẽrẽtis docẽrent, 


that I might teach, &c. | 
§0 decline manere, carere, Egere, ténére, habere, and By in cre, 
III. The Third Conjugation in ere. 


Q. How are Verbs in &e turned into their right endings ? 
469. A. Verbs in ere are turned into their right endings of every Per- 


| fon, in every Number, Tenſe, and Mood, by changing ere into 
.. o is it mas is mal i Fn {| 


. cbam Ebis ebat P. ẽbamus Ebatis Ebant in the Pret. Imp. & Indicative. 
& am és Gt P. émus Etis ent is the Fut. | 

8.— Cor ito Ito P. ite or itote unto in the Fut. Imperat. 

s. am As at P. amus ätis ant in the Pre. | 

8. crem Eres Eret P. Eremus Erttis Erent 77 the Pret. Imp. Subjunctive. 
| 5. am , in the Fut. | 


Q. Give me an Exemple of a Verb in ère thus conjugated ? 
473. 4. Legere to read is ſo formed, thus: | 

1. In the Indicative Mood. | 
P. legimus legitis legunt. | 
7 do read or am reading, thou doft read, &c. | 


Pret. Imp. S. legebam legebas legẽbat P. legebamus legebiti legebant. 


J read, I did read, I was a reading, &Cc, 


Jill read, T ſhall be a reading, &c. 
2. In the Imperative Modd. 
d Jege or legito legito 
read thou fee he read 
3. In the Subjunctive Mood. | 
Preſ. & Fur. S. utlegam legas legat P. legimus legitis legaut 
o that I may read, o that thou, &c. | 
Pret. Imp. S. cum legꝭrem cum legꝭres cum legeret P. cum legerẽmus, Sc. 
when Twas a reading, when thou waſt, & c. when we read, &c. 
S/ decline creſcere, agere, gercre, fingere, and other, 15 cre 
Q Are all Verbs in ere thus declined in all Perſons t 
471. A. No; for there are three Exceptions. | 
Q Which is the firſt Exception in the third Conjugation ? 
472. 3 Except. I. Fer're (for fer&re) to bear, in ſome Perſons loſes a 
etter, thus: | 
N. B. And as you tell me what Letter it is, and where, and which Per- 


os ; | 
/ W arg righr, | 


Pp. legite or legitore legunto 
read ye | fee they read. 


naic. 


N — f fy 
EEE 2 — — 
* — r a 
—_ 8 : 
+ th $4 1 Py 


+ 22> - cherry 
n 


— . 
Y 2 4 N Rn 
3 rr _— 
„„ * A 0 Sw - 


— n 4 2 — — — 
Pr 7 
OE CE EEE 


3 
Bp = rept, 


64 Detlining of Uerbs, Chap, Nh. 


Pug 


Preſ. S. fero fer's fer't P. ferimus fer'tis ferunt, 7 bear, thn, 


Tadic.d Pret. Imp. S. ferebam-bas-bat P. bimus-bitis-bant, 7 bore, thin, % 
Fut. S. feram feres feret P. feremus feretis ferent, 7 iI bear, ts, 

Imperat. Fut. $.= fer or fer'to fer'to P. fer'te or fer'tõte ferunto Ber th, ih 
Fub- F Pref. S. ſi feram feras ferat P. feramus feratis ferant, if bear, &. 
Junct. Pr. Imb. S. cum fer'rem- res- ret P ferretnus retis- rent, æbben 7 bore, de 
Q. Mpich is the ſecond Exception in the third Conjugation ? ; 

473- J. Except. II. As fer is ufed for fere, ſo inſtead of dice, dice, 
fice, in the Second Perſon Singular of the Imperat. they uſe die, di, 
fac, caſting off the &. | 

Q. Which is the third Exception ? 5 

474. A. Except. III. For volère they uſe velle 0 will, to be willi, 
to + ni and it hath two Compounds 

olle {/rom non und velle) to be unwilling, to nill, to refuſe. 

Malle (om magis and velle) to be more willing, to have rather, to cb. 

And theſe three are declined wrong in four Tentes, but in the ref right, 


thus : 


C volo vis vult Pl. volimus vultis volunt 


Preſ. ) I will thou wilt he will toe will ye will they wil 
Sing. Ynelo nonvis nonvult PI. nõlümus nonvultis nolunt 

malo mävis mavult PJ. mãlümus mavultis malunt 
Pre. TD volebas volebat, &c. I was willing. 


A 


nolebam nolebas, &c. I was unwilling. 


Judicati 


Imp. 
Site. malebam malebas, &c. I gas rather willing, 
| volam voles volet P. volemus voletis volent 7 /pa/l be willin 
Fut. J nolam noles, Kc. | 
* malam males, &c. 


Impe- F veile and malle have no Imperative. 

—_—ſ\ noli or nolits reſuſe thou, don't thou. P.nolite or nolitote Jn! it 
velim velis velit P. velimus velitis velint if [ be willing, &. 

Pr A nolim nolis nolit P. nolimus nollitis nolint, if I refuſe, &. 

S. fi) malim malis malit P. malimus malitis malint if 1 ſhould chuje ee, 

Pret.\ vellem velles vellet P. vellemus-etis-ent / I were willing,K, 

Inp-< nollem nolles nollet P. -emus -etis -ent if 7 wonld mt, &c. 


Subjunfive 


S. ſi E mallem malles mallet P. -emus-etis - ent if I had rather, &c. 


- 


IV. The Fourth Conjugation in 7re. 


QQ. Hiw are Verbs in ire conjugated into every Perſon ? 


475. A. Verbs in ie are turned into the right endings of every Per | 


ſon by changing 7re into 

10 is 1 it P. imus Itis junt 7» the Pre/.! 

jebam iebas iebat P. iebãmus iebãtis iebant i» the Pret. Im. & Indicatitt. 
lam les let P. iemus jetis tent 72 the Fut. 

I or Ito ito P. — ite zr itote 1unto 77 the Fut. Imper. 

jam ids jat P. iamus tatis jant 77 tho Pre/. 

irem Ires iret P. tremus iretis irent 7» the Pret. I. on 
lam las lat, Ko. 4 in the Preſ. in the Fut. 


Q. Cie 


* 
Ny te 
(Ur 29, 

480. 


7 


QF 


— 

481. 
pere, ra 
and fo 7 
are dec 
J. jo 
icbal 
J. 1am 


Per- 


ligt. 


710, 


Giit 


| Imp. Subj, hath fierem, e/ſerobere it is declined right. 


Chap. XV. Declining of Uerbs. | 65 
QT "Q. Give me an Exemple of a Verb in ire ſo declined 4 8 
476. 4. Audire to hear is ſo declined ; thus; | 

1. In the Indicative Mood. | | 
Pri S. audio audis audit. P. audimus auditis audiunt 


Ido hear, thou doft hear, 5e. we dg hear, ye do hear, they do hear. 
pret. Inp. S. audiẽbam audiẽbas audiẽbat. P. audiebartius audiebaris audiẽbant 
T heard, I was a hearing, &c. 


| fit. Sing. audiam audiéẽs audit P. audiẽmus ahdittis augient 


I ſhall or will bear, thou ſhalt, &c. 
2. In the Imperative Mood. 


. audi or audito audito P. audite or audĩtõte audiunto 


hear thou, let him Bear. hear ye let them bear. 
z. In the Subjunctive Mood. | | 


N preſ. & Fut. S. fi audläam ſi audiis fi audiat p. ſi audiimus-t's-ant 


If I ſhould hear, if thou ſpouldſt hear, &c. 
pet. Inp. S. cum audirem audires audiret P. audiremus audirttis audirent 
roben I heard, or was a hearing, when tbon, &c. 

$1 decline finire, venire, ſalire, fulcire, ſarcire, and the reſt in ire. 

Q. Are all Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation thus declined 2 | 

477. A. No; there are 7 Exceptions : for, 

478. Except. I. Inflead of fire they uſe fi ri to become, which. in the Pretet 
479. II. Ire t9 go, and quire 10 be able, are in ſome place. wrong, thus, 

Preſ. S. eo is it P. Imus Itis eunt Igo, thou goeft, he goes, &c. 

Pret. Imp. S. ibam ibas ibat P. Ibamus Ibatis ibant 1 was going, &e. 

/ 


5 
L 
J 
SC Fut. S. ibo this Ihit P. ibimus Tbitis ibunt I po, &c. 


| Inperat. S. — i or to P. — ite or ĩtõte eunto go thou, &c. 


bab. 5 Preſ. & Fut. S. ſi eam eas eat P. eamus eãtis eant / I would go, &. 
ang. L Pret. Imp. S. irem ires ret P. irẽmus irétis irent if I went, &c. 

Hy decline quire. | 

N. B. The Participles are iens, G. euntis, and eundus for jendus. 

Q. Thus you have ſeen the fur Conjugations or ways of declining Verbs in re. 
Mey tell me, are there no Verbs in re but what are declined "ou one of theſe 
(our 204s 4 ? 

480. 4. There are twelve that are of 0 Conjugations. 


| 


\ 7. Twelve V whe partly of the III. and partly 
of the IV. Conjugation, 


Q. Which are thoſe twelve? 
481. A. Theſe twelve facere, j  JaCEre, lacere, ſpécère, födepe, füatre, Che 
pere, rapcre, sapcre, Cupere, parere, quatere, take in an i in moſt places, 
and ſo are partly of the third Conjugation, and partly of 35 fourth, and 
re declined thus, by changing ere into 
5 104 183 it 3 P. Imus 3 itis 3 junt 4 12 the Pref | 
d tba icbas iebat P. iebamus iébtis iẽbant 4 in rhe Pret. >Irdica ive 
d um ies Tet P. iemus icetis tent 4 in the Fut. 


8. 


66 Declining of Uerbs. Chap. XV. Chap 


S. — & er Ito 3 ite P. Ito or itõte 3 iunto 4 in the Inperat. 5 85 
S. 1am 1as iat P. jamus iatis 1ant 4 ix the Preſ. e 
Subjura, 


S. Erem Eres Eret P. eremus erctis <Erent 3 in Pret. Imp. 
5. iam tas iat P. iimus iitis ant 4 is ihe Fur. 


So facere to do is formed thus. 485. 
I. In the Indicative Mood. | | pi 
Preſ. S. facio facis facit P. facimus facitis faciunt f * 


Ido, thou doeſt, be does, we do, ye do, they do. 
Pret. Imp. S. faciẽbam, faciebas, c. I was a doing, thou waſt, &e, 
Fut. &. faciam facies faciet P. faciemus, Sc. I will do, &c. 
2. In the Imperative Mood. | | 
S.—face or fac facito facito P. facite or facitote faciunto do thou, &, 


ret. I. 


3. In the Subjunctive Mood. | Bra 
Pre & Fut. S. cum faciam facias faciat P. faciamus, Ic. when T ſhall do, xt. 
Pret. Im S. cum facerem faceres faceret P. facerẽmus, &c. en Twas doing, . Ts 

So decline the other eleven, and all their Compounds, and theſe have thii bi 
Participles in iens, as faciens, jaciens, capiens, &c. and in iendus, faciendu, 
* | * | * * Tel, In 

§. 8. Four Conjugations of Verbs in i. . 
N 
Q. Thus for Verbs in re, now how many ways are Verbs in i Conſigatiꝰ MW" * 


482. A. There are alſo four Conjugations of Verbs in ;; for 
art are of the Firſt 
„ eri are of the Second 3 
Verbs 190; aro of the Third C Conjugation. 
| iri are of the Fourth | 
Q. What mark is there to know Verbs of one Conjugation from Verbs if at 
other? | 
Firſt Conjugation have i long before ri, as amäri. 
Verbs 2 Second Conjugation have e long belore ri, as docerl. 
br ak Third Conjugation have i not &ri, as legi. 
Fourth Conjugation have I long before ri, as audirt. 
N. B. The Perſons of Verbs in i are firmed from thoſe of the Verbs in re, flu 
I. Where they have , theſe have or, amo amor amab-o-or. 
2. Where they have , theſe have r, amabam amabar ame- mir. 
3. Where they have 7, thele have tur, amat amatur amant-ur, 


I. The Firſt Conjugation in ari. 


Q. How are Verbs in ari made Finite, and turned into the right endings? 2 4 
484. A. Verbs in 477 are declined into the right ending oi every Peril | p 
in cach Number, of every Teaſe, and every Mood, by changing #ri in 14 


( 3. 00 

F. or arts or are aur P. imur imini antur Preſ. 78 
S. avar agqarls or abire abatur P. abimur abimini ibantur Pref. Inp. ( 
&. a>or aberis or abere abitur P. iDimur abimini abuntur Fut. 
8. — e er ator ator P.-imini or àminor antor 1x the Tut. 14 
eh 


y ? F , : | 
Chap. XV. Declining of Uerbs. | fo 
Fer Eris or Ete Stur P. Eemur Emini entur Preſ. | _ 
. irer areris or arere iretur P. arcmur iremini irentur Bret. Imp. 1 
o& Eris or Ere Etur P. Emur Emini entur Fut. (= 


2 Give me an Exemple of a Verb in ari ſo declined ? 
A. Amari zo be loved, is ſo declined, thus: | 
's In the Indicative Mood. | 
.S. amor amãris or amire amitur P. amimur amimini amantur 
Ian loved, thou art loved, he is loved, we are — ye — they are loved 
Pret. Imp. S. amabar -aris or -are -atur P. -amur -ãmini -antur 
T was loved, thou | roaſt loved, &c. | 
Fu S. amib-or -eris or -cEre -1tur P. -1mur -1mini -untur | 
1 ſhall be loved, thou ſhalt, &c. | 
2. In the Imperative Mood. | 
— amare or amãtor amãtor Pate; or amiminor amantor 
be thou loved, let him be loved be ye led let ſbem be loved. 
3. In the Subjunctive Mood. 
%% & Fut. S. Si amer ameris or amcre amẽtur P. amẽmur amemini amentor 
VI be loved, if thou, &c. 
ry, Inp. $. cum amar-er -Eris or -Ere -Etur P, -emur -emin) -entur 
when I was loved, when thou, &c. | 
dy decline creãri, formãri, damnãri and all Paſſives in ri. And Deponents 
ir, but eng l'ſþ them Actively, az venãri to hunt, coniri 20 2 &c. 


wu! 


II. The Second Conjugation in eri. 
Hv are Verbs in èri Con jugaled aright ? | 
1486. 4. Verbs in 777 are turned into their right endings of &: ere ch Perſon 
s by changing 777 into 


f at: 


er Eris or cre Stur P. émur Emini entur in the Pre/.) Þ 

tar ba bbs tur P. ẽbãmur ẽbãmini Ebantur Pret S 

ebaris or Tbare Evatur P. Ebamur Ebamini Ebantur Pret. Imp. & = 

tvor Ebcris or EbEre Ebitur P. ebimur Ebimini ẽbuntur i» the Fut. YE 

ere or ẽtor ẽtor P. —emini or Eminor Cntor in the Imperat. 

10% earis or eare eatur P. eimur eãmini eantur in the Preſ. 7 © 
er ErEr1s or ErEre Erctur P. Eremur ErEmini Erentur Pret. Imp. WV: 

: er earis or eare lite the Pre. in the Fut. J & 


Give me an Exemple of Verbs in èri {5 declined? 
837. J. Doceri to be taught, is ſo conjugated ; as thus, | 
1. In the Indicative Mood. | 
9 doc or doceris or docẽre docẽtur P. docẽmur docẽmini docentur 
I am taught i. e. now a teaching, thou art, &c. | 
Inp. S. doceb-ar -aris or- Are -itur P. -imur -imini -antur | 
I was taught or à teaching, thou waſt a teaching, &c. 
as or -Eris or -Tre - itur P. imur - imini -untur | 
I ſhall be taught, thes ſhalt, &c. 
In the Imperative Mood. 
docère or docẽtor docẽtor P. — docẽmini or doceminor abcentor, 
be tbau taught, let him be be ye taught, let 92 mo 
2 . n 


i 

1 

| 
| 
| 
1 
i 


Ingo 
$. <> 


WS. 
— 


2 : = 


- 
JW. 
Y 
4 i 
N i 
. 1 
2 
k 


Z 
j 
i 


. 
| 
f 
i 
1 
o +t 
J N . 0 
e 
510 
„ ; x 
i 30 il 
IF 
© 3 4 
+ *IF p 


wo — bv |: 


4 n LPS. ga, 8 * 
n - IS. 4 — — 2 
—— — — . — EG ROE, = 


oa GEL CB ee Ae let ne 3 * = 


3. In the Subjunctive Mood. 
Pref. & Fut. S. ut doce-ar -aris or are -atur P. -amur -amini - antur 
| that I may be taught, that thou, &c. 
Pret. Imp. S. cum docerer cum doctreris or docerere cum doctrityr, TH 


68 Declining of Uerbs, Chap. XV. 


— 


zwhile I roas a teaching, while thou wert, &c. i. e. in being tauzjj] 
dg”? 


So decline tenèri, habèri, moneri, and other Paſſives in ©ri, aud % engl 
them. And Deponents ix Eri, but engliſh them Actively, vercri t jy 
tuẽri to behold, reri to think, &c. 


III. The Third Conjugation in i. 


Q. How are Verbs in i of the Third Conjugation declined. 
488. A. Verbs in 7 of the Third Conjugation are turned into their ri 
endings by changing i into _ 
S. ör Ens or cre tur P. 1mur 1mini untur in the Preſ. 
P. bar Ebaris or ẽbãre ẽbatur P. ẽbãmur ẽbãmini ẽbantur Pre, Ins. 
§S. ar Eris or Ere Etur P. Emur Emini entur iz the Fut. 
S. —— ere or itor itor P. 1mini or 1minor untur zz the Impirc 
'$. ar Aris or ire atur P. äàmur amini antur in the Pre/ 
S. erer ereris or Erere Erctur P. Eremur Ereminl Erentur Pref, Inp > 
F. ar 1 or are ãtur P. imur iamini antur ia the Fut. 
Q. Gize me an Exemple . Verb in i ſo declined ? 
489. A. Legi 1s be read is fo conjugated, as, thus: 
1. In the Indicative Mood. 
Preſ. S. legor legeris or legere legitur P. legimur legimini legu 
Jam read, or I am now a reading, thou art, &c. 
Pret. Imp. S. leg{bar legebaris or legebire legebatur P. leg7bimur, & 
1 was read, or I was a reading, i. e. in being read. 
Fut. S. legar legeris or legere legẽtur P. legemur legemini legentur 
T ſhall be read, thou fhalt, &c. | 
2. In the Imperative Mood. 
S. —— legere or legitor legitor P. — legimini or legiminor )egut 
be thou read, let bim he read, be ye read, lei them" 
3. In the Subjunctive Mood. 
Preſ. & Fut. S. ſi legar legaris or legare legãtur P. legamur Jegamini leg 
| if { be read, if thou beeſt, &c. 
Pret. Imp. S. cum legerer legereris or legèrẽre legeretur P. legeremur, 
| when I was read or a reading, i. e. in being read. 
So decline emi, vendi, agi, fundi, and all Paſſives ix i. 
490. And ſo decline the Deponents in i, but engliſh them Adiveir 
fungi to diſcharge, fruit, lo enjoy, uti to uſe, &c. 
QQ. Are all Perbs in | of the Third Conjugation thus declined ? 


491. A. There is one Verb ferri 70 be born, that loſes a Leiter ini 


Perſons; as, ; 
< © Pref. S. feror or ſer'ris fer're ſer'tur P. ferimur ferimini ferunt 
W 9 5 MTs 8 

2 Pret. Imp. S, fer-bir fei ẽbaris or ferẽbare ſersbãtur, Cc. 
= # Fut. S. ferar feréris or ferere feretur P. feremur. &.. 
Imp. Fut. S. — fer're or fer'tor fer'tor P. — ferim ini or feriminor ferun 
Subj. Preſ. & Fus “. ſi ferar feraris or terare teratur P. ſeramur, © 


0 þ 


pd | ini | 
00. Pret. Imp. S. ſi fer'rer fer'reris or fer rere fer'retur, c. 


„„ 


IV. The Fourth Conjugation in irs 


Q. How are Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation in ĩri declined ? 

492. A. Verbs in 7ri are turned into the right endings of every Per- 
ſon by changing 7r7 into | 
S. tor iris or tre ttur P. imur imini juntur iz Preſ. 7 Þ 


b. lẽbar ĩẽbaris or 1Ebare iẽbãtur P. iẽbãmur - mini antur in Prez. D 
6. lar ieris or ière iẽtur P. 1emur iemini ientur in Fut. V 


g. — ire or ĩtor itor P. — imini or iminor iuntor i» the Inper. 
6. jar laris or lare ĩãtur P. iamur iamini jantur in Preſ. 7 
S. irer ireris or rère jiretur P. iremur iremini irentur Pr. Imp. ><. 
S. iar 1aris, &c. | in Fut. N 
Q. Give me an Exemple of a Verb iniri fo declined? 
493. 4. Audiri 10 be heard, is ſo formed, as thus: 
I. In the Indicative Mood. | 
Preſ. S. audlör audiris or audire auditur P. audimur audimini audiuntur 
I am heard, thou art beard, he is heard, we are— ye are — they are 
Pret. Imp. S. audiebar -aris or -are -amur -amini -antur | 
I was heard, i. e. in being heard, thou waſt heard, &c. 
Fat. S. audiar audiëris or -ere audietur P. audiẽmur audiẽmini audientur, 
1 fhall be heard, thou ſbalt, &c. | — 
2. In the Imperative Mood. 1 | 
. audire or auditor auditor P. audimini or * audiuntor 
be thou heard, let hin, &c. | | 
3. In the Subjunctive Mood. | 
Preſ.& Fut. S. fi audiar audiaris or audiãre audiatur P. audiamur, &. 
if I be heard, if thou, &c. EF, 
Pret. Imp. S. 11 audirer audireris or audirere audirẽtur, r. 
if 1 were heard, &c. = : 
So decline finiri, puniri, hauriri, and all Paſſives in iti; and Deponents, 
engliſh them Actively, as metiri to meaſure, mentiri to lye, ordiri 10 
gin, & c. | | 
Are all Verbs in i declined after theſe four Conjugations ? 
494. A. No, for there are two ſorts that are of two Conjugations. 


Fifteen Verbs in i partly of the Third and partly of the Fourth. 


Q Which is the firſt ſort? > | 

495. A. There are 15, Verbs in i, gradi, mori, pati, and the Paſſives of 
thyje 12 Jet dacon num. 481. that ſhould be of the Third Conjugation, but 
in ſome places take in an i and are of the Fourth, thus, 
d. ior 4 Eris or Ere 3 Itur P. Imur 3 1mini 3 juntur 4 Pref. 3 & 
S. iẽbar iEbaris or iebare iẽbatur P. jebamur 1ebamini iEbantur 4.Prer. 5 


= 

d. iar ieris or icre ictur P. iẽmur, c. in the Fut. YN 

§.— cre er ſitor itor 3 P. —imini or iminor 3 jiuntor in Impera. 

S. iar taris or tare ijatur P. jamur, &c. 4 in the Preſ. 7 Y 

§. erer Ereris or &rẽre Erctur P. Eremur, Oe. 3 in the Fut. 8 
| 


| 
| 
| 
| 


70 Declining of Uerbs, Chap. Xy 


N. B. And theſe make their Participles in iens and iendus 4 8 

f Sradienz 
going, moriens dying, capiendus to be taken, &c. 

Q. Whith is the jecond ſort ? 

496. 4 Oriri and potiri fpould be of the fourth Conjugation only, by 
they are declined partly in the third, and partly in the fourth, as thi: befur; 
orior oreris or orcre, oritur, poterer poterEris, c. ; 


F. 9. The Declining of Verbs in 772 


Q. Having Conjugated Verbs in re and i, that ſignify Imperfectly, yy 
tell how Verbs in iſle that fignify Perfectly are Conjugated ? 

497. A. Infinite Verbs in 7/7 are made Finite thus, by changing /; into 
$41 _ niit 
S. cram Eras Erat P. Eramus eritis Erant in the Preterpluperf. S8 
S.cro eris <Erit P. erimus eritis erint in the Fut. Perf. \\ 

N. B. Verbs in iſle have no Imperative, for you can't command a thing to 
have done. 

S. erim Eris Erit 


297 


P. erimus eritis Erint ix the Pret. Perf. 9 
TS 
8 


S. iſſem iſles iſſet P. iſsemus iſsẽtis iſſent in the Preterpluperf. 
S. Ero eris eErit P. erimus eritis erint iz the Fut. Perf. 


N. B. The Fut. Perf. Subj. is the ſame with the Fut. Perf. Indic. 
Q. Give me an Exemple of a Verb in iſſe ſo declined ? 
498. A. Legiſſe to have read, is ſo declined, as thus: 
1. In the Indicative Modd. 
Pret. Perf. S. legi legiſti legit P. legimus legiftis legerunt or legere 
T have read, thou haſt read, &c. | 
Preterpluperf. $.\egEram legeras legerat P. leger-amus -itis -ant 
I had then read, thou hadſ} read, &e. | 
Fut. Perf. S. legero legeris legèrit P. legerimus legeritis legerint 
| T ſhall have read, thou ſhalt haze read, &c. 
2. In the Subjunctive Mood. 


Pret. Perf. 8. ſi legerim legeris legerit P. legerimus legeritis legerint 


if I have read, if thou, &c. 
Preterpluperf. S. cum legiſſem legiſſ-es -et 
| when I had read, when thou, &c. 
Fut. Perf. S. cum legero legeris legerit P. leger-imus itis -int 
when I ſhall have read and done it, when thou, &c. 

82 decline amaviſle amavi amaviſti, c. amaver-am -as -at, c. 
docuiſſe docui docuiſti, c. docueram, &c. docuero, c. docuerim, &. 
audiv-iſſe i - iſti, Sc. -Eram, Ec. -Ero, Sc. -erim, Sc. iſſem, c. 
and all Verbs Infinite in 2%. = 

99. N. B. Ccepiſle, odiſſe, and meminiſſe having n7 Imperſects, are 
only declined thus ; but memento remember thou, and mementote remember 
ye, are ujed in the Imperative. e 


P. -emus -Etis -ent 


The 


poiſe ( 
{by the. 
| From 


1. 
Pre, 8 


90 pe 


P. imus iſtis Erunt or ere in the Pret. Perf ) Peet. I. 


Chap 


500 


$7 po 
ful, ö. 


dy Pc 


timing 
"trio, © 
in proce 


: 
1 
1 


(Chap: XVI. Bententes and Phaſes, 71 


The Declining Efe and Poſſe. 


& Have we now done with Conjugating Verbs and learned all ? 
o. A. There remains yet one Verb / and its Compounds, poteſſe or 
by than potis ab/e and eſſe zo be, &c. which are declined in a * 
hy themſelves, thus, | 
| "oY eſſe to be, and poſſe to be able, are formed | 
I. In the Indicative Mood. 


1 
| 


s Sm es, eſt FP. ams eflis unt 
ö lam thou art be is we are ye are they art 
do poſſum potes poteſt P. poſsumus poteſtis poſſunt 7 45 able, &c. 
2 Inp. 8. Eram Cras- erat P. eramus eratis erant 
I was thou waſt he was we were ye were they were 

| 0 poteram poteras potèrat P, poteramus, Sc. 1 was able, &c. 

u. S. Erco Eris Erit P. Er1imus Eritis | Erunt 


1 ſhall be thou be we ſhall be ye — they ſhall be 
c potero poteris Poterit P. poter- -1mus -Iitis -unt. 7 Ha qe able, &c. 
2. In the Imperative Mood. | 
cs or eſto elto P. eſte or eſiõte ſunto | 
be thou let him be bee let them be. 
N. B. Poſſe hath no Imperat. for we don't uſe to bid one be able. 
5. In the Subjunctive Mood. 
rſ. & Fut. S. fi ſim fi eis fi sit P. 4 simus ſi sitis | fi ſint 
if I may be, if thou, &C. | 
$ ſi poſſ-im 15 - it P. — imus : ĩtis -int 7 I be able, Xe. 
Pit. Imp. ſi eſſem fi eſſẽs ſi eſſet P. ſi eſsẽmus fi eſsẽtis f eſſent. 
if I were, if thou wert, &c. 
d poſſem poſes poſsẽt P. poſsẽmus poſsetis poſſent,if 7 were able, &c. 
And thus you have learned to decline all declinable Words, 

N.B. In theſe things the Learner muſt be ſo long exerciſed by daily repetitions, 
unination, &c. till he can without heſitation give any Ward in any Caſe, 
Win, Tenſe, &c. that you ſhall call for in an hundred inſtances, and then let 
in proceed to Sentences, and be will preſently do them to admiration. 


CHAT XVI. 
Of Sentences and Phraſes, 


it | 
Nox, that you have learned the eight ferts of Wordt, and Jens jo decline 
Nouns, Pronouns, Verbs and Participles tell me what is io be done 

mm 7 Words ? | 


jolt. 4. The uſe of Words is to make Sayings or Sententes. 

bat is a Saying or Sentence? | 

502. A. A Sentence is ſo many Words as expreſs our meaning o. that 
that hears it can underſtand our mind thereby, 

L How many Words go to the making of a Sentence? | 

$03. A. 1. Sometimes one Word makes a Sentence, as 45! FLY Fie! 


2. Some: 


| 
| 
— — 
| 
| 
| 


„ ger we — — — — 
» 4 = 1 4 | * 


3 2 — 2 OI ———— FEE 


ä — — — 
a — Fe 


* 


* n 


r 
LI 2 ' 4 


1 Ea — — Sa 5 . — 
„ 8 —— — g 7 
2. — N12 a 
* = — <= 4 


7 _ e 0 
by 5 * go 
wy —— — — i oy 
: —— . — 
_ es 3 — 


CES p +: 
* $4 wa T1 
watt eve; 
3 > 4 ied 


— 
2 


> 


72 Beentences and Phaſes Chap. xv; MW c 
2. Sometimes two; as, Maſters teach. Boys learn. Time bos, ” 
3. Some Sentences are made of three Words; as, Life is ſort, D, . 

will come. | | 

4. Some of four; as Goodneſs alone giveth honour. Diligence nale: 

Scholar. Good Children are dutiful. | ; 
5. Sometimes foe Words make a Sentence; as, 14lenz/; keeps fouls i 

Tenorance. Bad Teachers make bad Scholars. | 
6. Sometimes /ix, ſometimes ſeven, ſometimes eight, ſometimes nin, l: 
Q. If there be but one Word in a Saying, what Word is that? 2 
504. A. If there be but ove Word in a Sentence, it is an Inter jectimn, fy 

no other Word but i can alone expreſs the meaning of ones mind. 
Thus, when we would expreſs that we 

would have one attend, wwe ſay O] or Eho! or Heus! O! Hz! $9! 

would have one come to us, we ſay, Ehodum ! or Heus ! Soho! 

would have a thing taken out of our fight, we ſay, Apage! Out! ay! 

would have ſilence made, we ſay St! or Au! Whit! Huſh! Peace 

Would ſheew ſomething to be obJerved, we ſay En! or Ecce! Lo! Beboli 

are ſurprixed with wonder, we ſay vah! or Pape! Strange ! Heigh! 

account an act bravely done, we ſay Eu! Euge! or Evax! O brave ! I}, 

account it mean and flight it, we ſay, Hui! or Vah! or Phy ! Pie] Pip! 

are deeply affefied, we ſay OI O! or Ah! Ab! | 
account the caſe pitisus, wwe ſay Hei! or Heu! or Eheu! Ab! Alas! All 
denounce woe to any, we ſay Hei! or Ve! Woe! Wailagay ! 

505. N. B. So that to expreſs any thought that may be expreſſed by on 

Interjection, you may uſe an Interjefion alone. 

Q. What if there be more Words than one, how muſt they be put tige 
to make Sentences ? 

506. A. Every Word is to be joined to ſome other Word in the Se 
tence, and to be rightly joined; and theſe two Words are called a Ph 

Q. What then is a Phraſe ? | | 

507. A. A Phraſe is two Words put rightly together towards makin 

a Sentence, as the beſt Speakers have uſed to do; as, 

I am, thou art, he is, zo? J art, the u is, he am. _— 

I love, thou loveſt, he loveth, xo? I loveth, thou love, he loveſt, % 
Q. How may a Learner kuow how to put Words rightly together as thiy did 
508. A. To teach you that, here ſhall along be ſet down 
I. Exemples ſhowing how the beſt Speakers put words together. 
II. Rules direQting you to 7mitate them. 


III. Exerciſes for your imitation of thoſe Exemples by the direction N 
theſe Rules. | 


N. B. And theſe three foall be full, plain and eaſv, and in the natural ord 
fo that you ſhall be taught the firlt motion in ſpeaking firſt, and the ſecond 
| cond, and the third third, &c. and your way ſhall be made ſo clear, and i Q. 
directions ſo true, and ail impediments ſo removed, that you cannot fail 51 


S. II. Dec. Sing. =" 
E ²˙¹⏑t% ‚ ˙. . 


IV. D-. f. III. Dec 
A Ya A I 


make any Sentence right, if you will take heed. thou 
Q. How many ſuch motions are to be made for making any Sententt? Q 
509. A. There are to be made XIII Motions, which will make I 51 

4 690] 


Ppraſjes. 
2 N 


vt Chap. XVI. Sentences. The I, II. Phafes. | 73 


wth §. 1. The firſt Phzaſe. 


; the Q. Which is the firſt motion towards making a Sentence? | 
510. A. The firſt fep is to call on that thing which we {peak to, as 
uu o Father ! O Master! Sobs Thomas ! 
Q. Which are the two Words to be put together in this firſ? Phraſe: ? 
„Ke. it. 4, The 1, is an Interjection of calling, as O, cho, heus. 
he 2, is a Subſtantive of the Vocative Caſe, as Pater ! Domine 
fot Q. Give = ſome Exemples how the Latins a/ed to put theſe * ? 
12. A. As, 
0 fla! O daughter ! Eho Adime ! Soho Adam ! Heus pater! Hs father ! 
o ima! © /, lo pũer! Oh Boy! Heus mater ! Ho mother / 
Q. What is the RULE 19 dire# us to make the like? | 
1 513. 4. Whenſoever any thing is to be called upon, | 
Firit uſe an Interjection of calling. O! Io! Eho! Heus! 
a! Then put to it the Name of the Thing cal/ed upon in the Vocative Cale. 
Q. Which are the Exerciſes for Imitation of this Phraje ? | 
ON: 514. A. 


i Anna! O Mary ! T ( lo filve! O flars ! 
2 JO Catharina! O Barbary! | ; YO dominæ! O Churches ! 
J) Elizabetha! O Joan! 8 JO fmine! 8 Paved / 
(Heus Thoma! O Luke! ( Heus ancille! FH girls! 


N. B. The Latin Exemples are to be turned into Engliſh , and te Engliſh 
into Latin. 


SO Abrahime! O Benjamin S CO Angeli ! O lords ! 

& | O Henrice! O Janes O c6qui! O bojs! 

J) O Paule! O Peter ! JO ͤviri! O priefti ! 

Jo Georgi! O Son! &}© fi! O minas ! 

O puer! O prieſt ] — | O magiſtri! O /ervitors ! 

(O cœlum! O temple! (O palatia! O kingdoms ! 

Co Daniel! O Samuel! | (O patres! O mothers ! 
|Q JO ol! O man! S O ſoröres! O brothers ! 

=YO latro! O thief! A JO cives! O Kings! 

c O judex ! O 3 ? = CO A 0 ſoldiers ! 

. O ſpiritug! 2 Jn? ö O wry O faces 

O domus! 5 O houſes ! O res! O things ! 
" =? O magiltritus ! O magiſtrates! | O dies! 2 days ! 


N. B. And this is = only uſe of the Voc. Gaſe to denote = thing called, 
| 


al ori | 
cond f $. 2. The Second Phaſe. | 
72 Q. Having called on the thing to hear us, what is next to be done ? 
f #41 


515. 4. The next ep is to tell what thing is, does, or is done, as, Jam, 
thou loveſt, a book is read. | 


ut? | What are the two Words in the ſecond Phraſe ” 
ke sro. 4. The firſt Word is a Subſtantive of the Nm. Caſe, as ; thou, 


4 691}, 
| 5 The 


1 l 
* ii! 
* is 2 


74 Denfences. The Second Phꝛaſe. Chap. XVI. 


The Second is a Verb finite, as Am, Loveſt, Is read. Os 
Q. How may I certainly know gvhich Word is to be the Nominative Ca? WM Ego 
517. 4. Firſt find out the Verb Finite, and then ask 2% is? who does? il 12 * 
or ho ſuffers ? or hat is? what does? or what ſuffers ? and the Word that Taur 
anſwers it is always of the Nominative Caſe, as I am, who is? J, that's the Nos 
N. C. in Thou love}, who loves? thou, that's the N. C. in the Book i; read, Vos > 
w hat is read? The book, that's the Nom. Caſe. Vin 
Q. Give me ſome Exemples Hot the Latins uſed to put theſe togetber? 


Sing 1. Ego ſum Tam Ego amo I love Ego amor I am loved 
2. Tu es thou art Tu amas thou love} Tu amaris thou art ln | 
3. Puer eſt the boy 75|Puer amat the boy loves [Puer amãtur the boy is In, 
Plur. 1. Nos ſumus we art Nos amamus we loge Nos amamur 202 are lei 


2. Vos eſtis ye are Vos amatis ye /ove Vos amamini ye are l,U= N. 
3. Pueri ſunt Sys are Pueri amant boys love Pueri amantur 50%, are Doub 
Q. hy is the Verb to every Naminative Caſe changed ſo? 
518. A. Becauſe of whatever Number or Perſon the Nom. Caſe is, fil (21 
the Verb muſt be put into the {ame to agree with it, ſo that | 
(of the Sing. Number, the Verb mult be of the Sing. Number too. Fro d 
Z of the P/ur. Number, the Verb muſt be of the Plar. Number too. N 
> Jof the irt Perſon, the Verb muſt be of the rf Perſon too. puer p 
= [ of the ſecond Perſon, the Verb muſt be of the /econd Perſon too. 
= Cof the third Perſon, the Verb muſt be of the third Perſon too. 
N. BI. £ Egois the Nominative of the firſt Perſon Singular. 10 P 
„ 2 Nos # the Nominative of the firſt Perſon Plural. LN 
\ , 5 Tu is the Nominative of the ſecond Perſon Singular. Fur pe 
2 Vos 7s the Nominative of the ſecond Perſon Plural. 
All other Nom. Caſes when ſpo- N Singular if one be meant. £20 ſe 
2 ken of, are of the third Perjon g Plural if more than one. Tu do 
.  Q. Now give me the RULE F the ſecond Phraſe. | alex! 
53 19. A. When one is to ſhew that ſomething is, does, or is done. 
1. Put down the Word for that thing in the Nominative Cale. 1 
And, 2. Put to it the Verb Finite in the ſame Number and in the ſame Perl, hat 
Or, A Verb Perſonal agreeth with its Nom. Caſe in Number and Perl. “ 
Q. Which are the Exerciſes in Imitation of the ſecond Phraſe ? 62: 
520. A. | | | 
Lb In 
br? . o | ; 0 
I. Exemples of Verbs ſignifying Imperfectly. Jn 
| lire fr 
Aud, 1. In the firſt C.njugation in ate. (0s ge 
| | 08 cac 
In the Preſent Tenſe Indicative Nui flu 
Ego ſto 1 walk Ego regno I breakfaſt 
Tu cubas Thou flande/ | Tu jentas Thou ſuppeſt Ivo va 
Avis volat The bullock lieth Coquus cœnat The King reigm u oy; 
Nos ambulamus Ve ſwim Nos clamamus JW: bleat Inguis 
Vos pugnatis Ye flee Vos latratis e cry ont 1755 
Piſces nant Bears fight Agni balant Dogs bark 


* Od OI EIA Ao CAC a OO nn | 


Chap. XVI. Senfences, The Second Phaſe, 


| 
In the Prater. Imp. Indicat. fs hs Boe . 
| 


Ego ſtabam I was walking | Ego jentabo T will fight 

Tu volabas Thou ꝛwaſt ſtanding | Tu pugnabis Thou will fi * Fall 
Taurus cubabat The or was flying | Thomas peccabit George ſhall break- 
Nos balabamus Wie were lying Nos regnabimus We will cry ont 
Vos nabatis Ye bleated (ing | Vos clamabitis 7 will thander 

Viri ambulabant Whales were fwim- | Nubes tonibunt Kings ſpall reign 
In the Imperative Modd. | 


Tu ambula Lie thou Tu ſtato Fieht thou | 

= Anas volato Let the trout ſwim | Miles pagnato Let the coach Rand 
Vos cubate Walk ye Vos crepatote Reign ye | 

bmones nanto Let ducks flie Reges regnanto Let bladders crack 


N. B. Exemples of the Subjunctive Mood you ſhall have in the Chapter of 


l. Double Sentences, 7% 20hich they belong. | 
WM 527. Exemples of the Second Conjugation in ere. 
| | | 
In the Preſent Indicative. | 
. Igo doceo T dine Nos ridemus We teach | 
0 Tu vides Thou bite}? Vos ſedetis Je jee BS 
Puer prandet Peter laughs Pueri flent Girls laugh | 


In the Præt. imperſe& Indicative. | | 


go prandebam I was ſetting Nos lugebamus We were laughing 
Tu mordebas Thou wa/? weeping | Vos mulgebatis > were ſpining 
Fur pendebat The man was dining | Puellæ nebant Thieves were banging 


In the Future Indicative. 
£20 ſedebo T ſhall ſee Nos nebimus Wie will teach | 


Ty docebis Thou wilt milk Vos mulgebitis Je ill ſpin 
alex mordebit The om. 20ill mourn | Viri prandebunt Men will ſit 


In the Imperative Modd. 


u doce Laugh thou | Vos ſedete Teach ye 55 
'ver prandeto Let . flea bite Puellz lugento Let * birds ſe 


522, Exemples of the Third Conjugation in ere. 


Perl, 


In the Preſent Indicative. In the Præter- Imp. Indicat: | 
0 curro J go | Ego ludebam 7 was roaring | 
, Tu vadis Thou runneſi Tu currebas Thou waſt fing ing 
lire fremit A river flows Rivus fluebat The wolf was playing 
os gemimus Wie fall Nos vivebamus We were running 
08 caditis Je groan Vos canebatis J were living (ing 
u fuunt Seas roar Arbores creſcebant Turtles N 
In the Future of the Imperf. Indicat. 
go vadam 1 ſhall play Nos cademus Mi ſhall grow | 
r cures Thou 540 all Vos ludetis 77 ſhall ge 
Inguls ſerpet A river ſcall _ + "_ fluent Snakes Pal wriggle 
2 ; 


7 

i# 

A; 

5 * 

\ | 11 

Mita 1 £8 
f A 2 3 
i 


| 
7 
#1 
5 
| 
1 
= 


76 


6 


Sentences. The Second Phzaſe, Chap. XVI. 


In the Imperative. 


Vos vaditote 
Unde fluunto 


Tu freme Play thou 
Gramen creſcito Let the wave flow 


523. Exemples of the 
In the Preſent of the Imp. Indic. 


Ego venio I prate 

Tu is Thou muttereſ# 
Agna falit The mole ſleeps 

Nos garrimus Wie go 

Vos mutitis Ye come 

Talpæ dormiunt Lambs leap 


In the Future of the Imp. Indic. 


Ego grunniam Till roar 1 
Tu rugies Thu eilt grunt 
Vacca mugiet An hor/e will neigh 
Nos mutiemus Wie will prate 

Vos garrictis Ye will mutter 

Equi hinnient Corus ill loro | 


524. §. II. Exemples of the Firſt Conjug. in an. 


In the Preſent Indic. of the Imp. 


Ego amor Jam liked 

Tu laudaris Thou art loved 
Fraus damnatur A letler is formed 
Nos probamur HW: are tamed 
Vos domamini are praiſed 
Literz formantur Cheats are cõdi n'd 


In the Future of the Imp. Indic. 


Ego laudabor I will be loved 

Tu probaberis Thor'lt be praijed 
Idõlum damnabitur A word bill be form 
Nos domabimur Vell be approved 
Vos amabimini Ye ill be tamed 
Verba formabuntur Idols till be cond. 


| 


525. Exemples of the 
In the Preſent Imp. Indic. 


Ego doceor T am held & 
Tu teneris Thou art moved 


Sol movetur The moon is affrighted 
Nos fovemur Vi are bitten 
Vos mordẽmini 27 are cheriſped 


3 


Roar ye 


Let cats run 


Fourth Conjugation, ge 
In the Præt-· Imperfect. Indica, ME wo 
Ego ſaliẽbam 1 tas grunting | Nos 
Tu dormiebas Thou waft rurin vos 
Hirundo garriebat The bear wa: nu, (rr 


Nos mutiebamus We were dancing 
Vos rugiebatis YTe were fleeing 
Porci grunniebant Men were pratin 


E ⁰ 

In the Imperative Mood. Tu! 

Tu muti Go thou | Fab 
Sus grunnito Let Sam. cont | Nos 
Vos garrite Sleep ye Vos 


Vituli mugiunto Let bubbles dane 


Animalia terrentur Boys are taught 


ry 


In the Præt Imp. Indicat. [ 
Ego damnabar I pa. afpprovel Wi 
Tu probabiris Thou wa/t lei £8: 
Sermo laudabãtur The book was fur: Ty 
Nos amabamur Me were tamed | Tir 
Vos domabimini + were cndem I No. 
Libri formabanturSpeeches ert ri. 5 
(il | or 
In the Imperative Mood. 
Tu laudare Be thou condimti 
Regina amator Let the Kinzin Wi 
be tamed Eg 
Vos probamini Be ye praiſed Tu 
IRegna domantor Let Quten be Sar 
Second Conjug. in e. 
In the Future Indicative. 
Ego mordebor I fpall be afrig"t Wi Ey 
Tu terrebẽris Thou ſhalt be bu, Ti 
Penna tenebitur A rout ſpall be e Ar 
Nos fovebimur We ſhall be man N. 
Vos movebimini Je hall be cheriſh Vi 
| Turbz docebuntur Pens ſball dH A, 


526. BK 


q £ "SEEK" ces : — 5 - n 
F » £9 n ha t N 
3 


11 Nchap. XVI. Sentences. The Second Phꝛaſe. 77 
526. Exemples of the Third Conjugation in 7. 
In the Preſent of the Imp. Indic. In the Przter. Imp. Indicative. 
Ego legor Jam ſold Ego emebar T was reuled 
| Ty venderis Thou art bought Tu vendebiris Thnu waſt led 
. uc emitur A book is read Verbum legebitur & coach was drawn 
Vos ducimur MW are drawn Nos trahebamur We were bought 
vos volvimini 27 are led Vos ducebimini V were ſold 
nu, WW Corttis trabuntur Vbeels are rouPd Globi volvebantur Wards were read 


— 


7 * o 19669 © 
in £27. Exemples of the Fourth Conjug. in iri. 
Ego audior T am puniſhed Ego vinciebar I was Arie ben 
Tu punĩris Thou art ſtricken | Tu feriebiris Thou waſt bound 
| Fabula finitur A wound is bound | Corpus puniebatur 4 ripe was felt 
. Nos ſentimur Wee are beard Nos audiebamur Me were ended 
Vos ferimini 272 are ſenſed Vos finiebamini 77 euere heard 
in; WW Vulnera vinciuntur Tales are ended | Verbera ſentiebantur Bodies were pun. 


K 528. Exemples of Verbs ſignifying Perfectly. 
| 1. Verbs in aviſſe. | | | 


In the Præter- Perfect. Indicat. In the Præter. pluperf. Indicat. 


4% £50 ambulavi I have bar ted | Ego naveram I had walked 

Tu erraviſti Thou Hat bawled | Tu ambulaveras Thou hadft flown 

4 Tinca navit A part. hath flown | Turtur erraverat The dog had Boro d 

Nos clamavimus Ve have walled |} Nos volaveramus Ve had bazled 

2 Vos latraviſtis Ye have ſtrayed Vos clamaveratis Ie had ſwwoum 
Perdices volavẽrunt Tench have ſcuum | Canes ululaverantT; urtles had ſtray'd 


| 


529. 2. In eviſſe. | 


mi | 
4n . In the Præter- perf. Indicat. | 

| Ego crevi T have wept Nos nevimus Wa. have grown 
Tu neviſti Thou haſt grown | Vos fleviſtis Ye bave ſpun 


| damuel fleyit The girl bath ſpun | Fontes creverunt Eyes have wept 


. 8 | 
530. In iviſſe. 1 
In the Præter- perf. Indicat. In the Præter- piu f. Indicat. 
Egoivi  T have muttered ] Egogrunniveram I had gone 
Tu dormiviſtii Thou haft prated Tu hinniveras Thou hadft mutter d 
Anus grunnivit An ear hath heard | Ovis iverat An aſs had roared 
os mutivimus We have gone Nos mutiveramus V had grunted 
Vos garriviſtis Ye have ſlept Vos garriveratis 12 had neighed 
Anres audiverunt Od 2097721 grunted | Aſini rugiverant The lords had prated 
: | 531. 4+ 


= 


78 


fm — 


Sententes. The Second Phaſe, Chap. xyſ 


— 


58 In uiſſe. 


In the Preter-perf, Indicative. In the Præter.pl. Ind 
Ego docui I have beld _ I had adviſag ne 
Tu monuiſti Thou haſt had © Thou hadft taughy Q 
Puer habuit The Father hath adviſed | The boy had bil} 3 
Nos tenuimus We have mingled We had mingled Fic 
Vos torruiſtis Ye have taught Je had had 
Viri miſcuerunt Men have roaſted | Cooks had roafted 
532. 5. I iſſe. 
In the Pczter-perf, Indicat. In the Præter- pl. Ind, 10 
Ego ſedi I have come { Ego fugeram 
Tu veniſti Thou haſt dined Tu ſederas 
Vermis fugit The houſe hath tumbled | Ver venerat 
Nos prandimus Me have nodded Nos rueramus 
Vos nuiſtis Ye have ſitten Vos pranderatis 
_ Domus ruerunt Worms have fie! Capita nuerant 
533. 6. In iſſe donb/ing. | Phe 
In the Præter-perf. Indicat. In the Preter-pl, Ind, Jiſcer 
Ego ſteti I have ruu I had hurg mitar 
Tu cucurriſti To Ha ton Thou haaſt run orm! 
Vultus cecidit A thief hath hung The ſparrow had ſung 540 
Nos pepedimus e have ſung We had fallen eore 
Vos ceciniſtis Ye have broke wind | Ve had broke wins Cb 
Fures pependerunt Countenances have fell | Feet had flood L 


(41, 
the 


gin 


534. 7 ii „ 
In the Præter-perf. Indicat. In the Præter- pl. Ind. 


Ego ceſſi IJ have laughed Ego riſeram T had fuck 
Tu manſfifti Thou haſt play'd Tu hæſeras Thou Hadi abidin 
Pumilio hæſit A torch hath ſpined Eliſa manſerat A candle had ſpini ceula 


Nos riſimus Mie have gone off | Nos ceſſeramus Ve had laugbed Gy 
Vos luſiftis Ye have abiden Vos luſeratis Ye had gone of Farm 


Faces luxerunt Dwarfs have luck | Candelz luxerant Fiſges bad play'd 
Q. Is this all that is to be learned about the Second Phraſe ? 5 
535. A. There are three things yet to be noted about this Second Phra, 
1. Two Nominative Caſes Singular, coupled together, ſpeak of more than 

one; and ſo being of the Plural Number, muſt have a Verb Plural. As 


Samuel & Benjami nus ludunt. Where obſerve bi 
1. I and another is as much as ee the firſt Perſon Plural. 542 
2. Thou and another is as much as ye the ſecond Perſon Plural. Me 
3. He and another is as much as they the third Perſon Plural; 45, Girl 
Ego & tu cœnamus J and thou do dine l 
Ego & Petrus jentamus and James do laugh | 643. 
Tu & porcus grunniebatis Thou and Fohn were a ſwearing 1. 4 


Tu & leo rugiebatis Thou and the aſs were a ma, z. A 
yer 
| 1 


my 


— 


puer & bubo boat The ſun and the moon will Hine 
inſer & olor nabunt The thief and the robber 294/11 hang 
Q Which is the ſecond thing to be obſerved here ? 

50. 4. 2. Not only Nouns and Pron. Subſt, but whatever ab that 
ch is, or doth, or is done, is accounted for a Nom. Caſe to the Verb. 
Q. How many po” are there? 

337. 4. T hree. The Gerund in dum is the Nom. to the Verb. 

* What is the Fey in dum ? 

63 A. The Gerund in n is the Neut. Gend. of the Particlple in dus, 
anandum, docendum; and it ſignifies that an act muſt be done; as, 


Ind, 


d. 


Amandum eſt Loving muſt be | 
Scribendum erat - There ſhould have been writing 
Fugiendum erit PDere will be a neceſſity to fe 

There is to learn 

There was a neceſſi . to beat 

There will be C. to fight 


q. 2. The Verb Infinite often tells what 7s, _ or /# er, and then 
kö the Nomin. to the Verb Finite; as, 
Jiſcere juvat To try evill belp | Laviſſe nocuit Ty have play'd irketh 
mitari placet To eat will pleaſe | Tacuiſſe puduit To have ſworn hurteth 
_ libet To arink will like | Fodiſle piguit To have flept pleaſetb 

o. 3. A Verb Infinite, with an Accuſ. before it, may be the Nom. 

tore the Verb Finite. And ſo may any Sentence that ſhews what i is, Oc. 
f which you ſhall ſee Exemples in the next Rule. 
Q Which is the third thing to be obſerved in the ſecond Phraſe: ? 
541. 4, 3. Note, that if the Verb be Infinite, the Word that ſhould be 


d, 


nd, zlilhed by that before it; as, Angelos wipere patet, that Angels live 1s 
ar. Qu. What is clear? A. That Angels live; and therefore that's the 
ominative Caſe to patet Qu. What lives? Angels, therefore that's the 


ide 
culative before the Verb Infinite. | 


bined 

bd mum peccaviſſe liquet That the moon glitters is clear 
F am ediſſe nocuit | That boys have play'd 1s plain 
aj'd tum vixiſſe patet That girls hw pleaſeth | 


N. B. And thus you have learned to expreſs that ſomething is, does, or 
ters, 5 | 


$. 3. The Third Whzaſe, | 


Q Which is the third Hep towards making a Latin Sentence? 
.. 4. The next thing is to expreſs that a thing is ſuch a thing, or 
nade ſuch a thing, or thought, or called ſuch a thing; as, I am a Man. 
il becomes a Woman. Cows are called Cattle. | 
Hav did the Latins do this? | | 
A A. If the Verb of the Second Phraſe were | 
A Verb of Being, as eſſe to be, tore to be. Or, | 
: $1 Verb of being made, as fieri to be made, to become. Or, | 
Verb of being thought, as putari, æſtimäri, naberl, Or, | A 
. 
| 


'f 
x 
: 
1 


1 


jap. XVI. Sentences, The Third Phzaſe, - 


the Nom. mult be put into the Accuſative Caſe. And then it is moſtly 


EEE 


* 
8 — — A 
- 4% Sabo; * 
* * d " " 
f. * 
—_ 


. - 8 + 
—ů ů —— bart 
 » at 


2 
* 
84 
* 5 
7 
4 
©” 
= 
& * | 
* 
1 
Y 
1 
> 
* 
* 
% 
+ 
1 
+ 4 
* 
4% 
1 $V . 
F 7 
* 
5 
* E 
1 
9 
1 
1 
=_ 
* 
1 
fy 
+ 
be» 
I 
1 
15 
* 


4 
- 1 
j 


om 


_— 8 


ta 


_— 
I * * — a 


— 8 
— 


LP Loa $A 


IS — 
* E 


80 Sentences. The Third Phzafe. Chap. xy 


4. A Verb of being called, as vociri, dici, &c, | — 5 
Then they put another Subſtantive after the Verb in the (an 0 
that the Subſtantive before the Verb was in. e Uh 

Q. Give me EXEMPLES' of this third Phraſe ? 


| lt 
| 4. | : | tl 
Ego ſum homo , Arbor habetur planta Vos vocamini magilt 
Tu fies aſinus Nos æſtimamur Apoſtoli | Enſes dicuntur arn; 


Q. Which is the RULE to teach me to do this? 
re! 
To expreſs that ) is made 
ſuch a thing is thought 
| is called | 
Firſt, put down the Firſt Subſt. and its Verb, as in the Sec. Phraſe 
Then put the Second Subſt. after the Verb, in the ſame Caſe thy ti 
Subſtantive before it is in. | 
Or, Sum, forem, fio, ex iſto, and certain Verbs Paſſives of being though 
and called, will bave ſuch Caſe after them as they had before then, 
Q. Now give me ſome imitations of this third Phraſe ? 


ſuch a thing = or 


546. A. 
Ego ſum pater I an a grandfather Ego eram mater 
Tu es filius Thou art a granachil/ |} Tu eras foror | th 
Martha eſt filia A woman ts a mother ] Robertus erat frater TI 
Nos ſumus avi We are fathers Nos eramus virgine: of, 
Vos eſtis nepotes Ye are ſons Vos eratis puellæ 5 
Mulieres ſunt matres Girls are daughters Viri erant pueri lai 
Ego ero judex 1 will be a theif Ego fuji magiſter | 
u eris miniſter Thou wilt be a cut-throat | Tu fuiſti diſcipulus 
Gulielmus erit fur De maid will be a Mrs. | Presbyter fuit diacauſi „ 
Nos erimus latrones We will be judges Nos fuimus proceres ( 
Vos eritis adultèri Ye will be hogs Vos fuiſtis cives | 
Ancillæ erunt herz Scholars will be maſters | Duces fuẽrunt milia WF De 
2. Exemples of fieri, to become 2 
Morbus fit febris Meat becomes fleſh Young ones become bird: Wi ( 
Puer fiebat vir Drink became urine Calves were made bull 
Amor fiet odium Blood will become milk Lambs will be made fi- ; 
3. Exemples of putari, æſtimari, haberi. 2 
Ego putabor gigas Nos habebimur beſtiæ Jam thought an ou! ( 
Tu æſtimaberis pumilio Vos æſtimabimini bubones | Thou art eſteem d a! ( 
Capo habebitur gallus Gallinz putabuntur olores | A waſp's account 
| 3 xemples of vocari, dici. 5 
Ego vocor umbra J was called a camel We are called hu Es 
Tu diceris vipera Dou wafſt called an elephant Cotes were called id 3 
N. B. 547. If theſe Verbs be uſed infinite, the Word after them mil AH Ne 


into the Accuſ. Caſe, as the Word before them was. See No. 541. a8, 


Liquet me eſſe patrem Ii is clear that I am a grandfather- "y 


3 un 9,” _ ta 
3 * 


Chap. XVI. Sentences. The Fourth Phzaſe, 81 : 


Placet te elſe filium It is pleaſing that thou art a grandchild 
pudet me fiert furem Its ſhameful that Soldiers have been thieves. 
N. B. 1. The reaſon why the two Subſt. are put in the ſame Caſe, you will 
urn in the IX Phraſe. 2. The Nominative Caſe is no more uſed in the La- 
| tin Tongue but in theſe two Phraſes. | 


$. IV. The Fourth Phzaſe. | 


Q Which is the Fourth Phraſe ? | 15 
| 48. 4. The F ourth Phcaſe is to expreſs an 4Fing on ſomething, as, facere 
opus, 7 do a work ; amare bellum, zo love car; claudere os, to fout the mouth. 
Q. What two Words make this Fourth Phraſe ? FEE 
540. 4. The 1. is a Verb that betokens 7 act upon ſomewhat. 
The 2. is a Subft. in the Accuſ. Caſe, that betokens the thing atted ons 
Q. It ſeems then that all Verbs cannot be uſed in this Phraſe # | 
550. A. No: For no Verbs Neuter, nor Verbs Paſſive, nor all Verbs 
Active neither, can have thus an Accuſative Caſe after them. | 
Q. Tell me which V. erbs Active may, and which may not be uſed in this Phraſe. 
551. A. A Verb Active betokens to do, and of ſuch there are two ſorts: 
1. Some ſo betoken to act, that the action paſſes over on i and 
there is ſomething done, or acted upon, as in, cædete canem, to /znite a dog. 
The action of /miting paſſes upon the dog: The dog is the thing afed upon, 
or ſmitten; and ſuch Verbs are called Tran/itive from tranſire to paſs oper. 
2. But ſome Verbs Active betoken barely to do, and there is no action 
aid to paſs over upon any thing. So Regnare, nare, repere. [Theſe ſignifie 
to do, to reign. to ſtoim, to creep, but we ſay not to reign any thing, to ſwim, 
| | or to creep any thing; and theſe are called Verbs Intranfitive, 
lus Now only Verbs Tranſitive which betoken 79 a on ſomething, can have 
ac an Accuſative Caſe after them, according to this Phraſe. | 
_ Q. Give me ſome EXEMPLES of this Phraſe. £1 
2. A. mn | | | | 
— creavit mundum The world is the thing created A therefore is 


gil 


ma 


lite 
Dominus formavit hominem Man is the thing formed put in the Ac- 
| Homo colebat hortum The garden ts the thing tilled cuſative Cale, 
Q. Give me the RULE of the fourth Phraſe. 5 
A. To expreſs an acting on ſomething. | 
1. Put down a Verb Tranſitive. And | 
2. Add to it the Subſt, Name of the thing acted upon, in the Acc. Caſe. 
Or, all ſuch Verbs as are Tranſitives have after them an Accuſative Cale. 
Q What doth this Rule teach more than I knew before? 
553. A. Only to put an Accuſative Caſe after a Verb Tranſitive. 
Q. Give me ſome EXERCISES far imitation of this? | 


ird; 
170 
Aal 


2 ow! 
I 
11600 


$54. 4. | | 
i ol Ego orno ædes Icbange a garment Ego arabam agrum 
Me Ta mutas veſtes Thou keepeſt gowns | Tu plantabas plantam 
Faber format claves A /heep makes a lamb Aer necabat herbam 
uſt beþ Nor p 1 15 | | 
ws 08 Juvamus plebem He adorn a building Nos voribamus pyra 
Vos ſervatis togam help the 126418 Vos vitabatis vitia 
Ph Oyes ereant agnos Smiths Ps key Apes guſtabant thymom 
| | — | 4 a k 


| 
| 
| 
j 
6 


. N 5 1. * 
5 * 
* 0 


82 Sentences, The Fourth Ph2afe, Chap. XVI, 


— — 


T ſhall love the apples Ego turbavi fontem 
Thos ſbalt like the cherries Tu ſtrangulaviſti vermem 
The leaf will hide the grapes Vulpes damnavit uvas 
We will kill the locuſts Nos probavimus poma 
Te will number the flowers Vos laudaviſtis pruna 
Tongues will praiſe the nuts | Rami celaverunt fructus 
Ego docueram diſcipulos *' I had ſupped up the pottage 
Tu ſorbueras cereviſiam Thou haaſt held the butter 
Paulus tenuerat poculum Peter. had had the wine 
Nos exercueramus artem We had taught the Church 
Vos arcueratis hoſtem 7e had exercijed abe ſoldiers 
Vaſa habuerant mel | Armies bad kept off armies 
Ego carpſi mala | I have eat a cherry 
Tu ediſti ceraſa Thou haſt drun wine 
Pediculus ſuxit ſanguinem The bear hath crop'd an apple 
Nos bibimus aquam We bade ſucked waters 
Vos mandiſtis panem | Ye have gnawed cheeſes 
Mures roſerunt caſeum 


| Hogs have champed beans 
Ego venor cervum J ſmell ivies | Ego patiar te 
Tu ſequeris leporem Thou lookeft to the peaſe Tu ſolaberis me 
Mas tuẽtur fœminam The hare follows the dig Sara mirabitur ſe 


Nos ordimur fabulam We deſerve honour Nos hortabimur vos 
Vos meremini laudem 27 begin flories - Vos imitabimini nos 
Heodi odorantur hederamCats hunt flies Teſtes verebuntur ſe 


Q. Are only Nouns and Pronouns Subſtantive the Accuſative Caſe ofin 
Verbs Tranſitive ? | 
555. A. Not enly Nouns and Pronouns Subſtantive, but whatere 
other word or words betoken the thing done or acted upon, are accounted 
the Accufative Caſe to the Verb Tranſitive. | 
So 1. AVerb Infinite is the Accuſative Caſe after the Verb Tranſitive; u, 


Ego amo ludere Fu{\ zo play P S N loved And therefcre i 
Tu cupis dormire E to ſleep P 3 deſt red accounted of the 
Mus conatur currere JE te run J C endeavoured & Accuſative Cale 
Ego didici ſeribere I dare 10 fight Delphin non vult capi 


Scapha ſolet nare Thou uſeſt to bray Nos experimur ſcire 
Palices audent mordere An animal loves to eat Pueri debent conſiderate 

Q Which is tbe ſecend thing put after Verbs Tranſitive as an Accuſative Caſe? 

56. A. II. An Infinite Verb with an Accuſative before it according to 
Ne 541. is put oft as an Accuſative after a Verb Tranſitive. As, 
Nos ſcimus leonem rugife That a lion roars tis the N He and ſo af 
Ego video torrem arderg? That a brand burns the Ac- 


a ren 
Tu negas tubam fonare* That a trumpet ſounds Ching denied Ncul. Cie 
Ego ſentio ignem urcre 1 think that the King comes 
Tu putas te valcre Thou believeſt that tones live at 
Bubo credit ſe cancre John ſaith that he feareth jg 
Nos ſcimus vos furere "Te feel that live coals burts | 
Vos dicitis nos ridere Ye ſay that hens prate 


amines aiunt Vapores 071i Old women think that ſtar: Fall | 


8 


= 
| 
| 


MW... xvI. Sentences, The Fifth Phaaſe. | 


1 putas cellam arſiſſe 
etrus jurat ſe metuiſſe 


Num Rex venit? 
[mo Rex venit 
Rex non venit 


«a Verb, 


05 | 
10s 
r {e 


ofitr 


atevel 
uunted 


fon to the Verb. 


Ubi vos habitatis ? 

Ego habito hic 

Familia habitat ibi | 
Quid uſquam manet diu? 
Unbrz manent nuſquam 
Unde res veniunt ? 

Rixz veniunt hinc 


ve; u, 
fore is 
of the 
» Cale. 


cap! Schola migravit inde 
Are (uo vos gradimini? 
1derare Bl Nos grad imur huc 
Ce? Quindo venit hiems ? 


ding to 


nd ſo o 
the At- 
ul. Cale 


Nix cecidit heri 
Cheies venit dudum 
Grando crepavit olim 
Hens fremit jam 
aber venit mox 
An ceœlum ruit unquam? 
ard ardet nunquam 
des tu legitti biblia ? 
1 biblia ſemel 
h __ \\*git Lucam bis 
al mus ſtepe 
: _ ſemper 


your thought by an Adverb or 


. Set down the Verb according to the foregoing Rules. 
z To it add the Adverb or Prepoſition. 
VB. So that all that this Rule teaches, is to put an Ad 


v me ſome IMITATIONS.. 


o judico vos dormiviſſe I have known that play bath harmed 

Thou remembreſt that the earth bath quaked 
The man hopes that faults have been hid 
N. B. The Interjectiont, En! Ecce! Hem! Proh! and Apage! (which 
iu is a Verb) when uſed Tranſitively, have an Accuſative Caſe; as, En 
nm! Ecce altaria! Hem Davam tibi! Prob fidem! Apage iflam ſalutem ! 


S. V. The Fifth Phzaſe. | 

C Which is the Fifth flep to be mage in making Sententes ? 

558. 4. The fifth Phraſe is when we expreſs our thoughts by an Adverb 
Prepoſition added to a Verb; as, To love now, To ſtay Bere, &c. 

G Which then are the two words relating to each ather in this Phraſe? 

9. 4. The, firſt is a Verb, as ſet down by the Second Phraſe. 
he ſecond is an Adverb or Prepoſition added to that Verb. 

Give me ſome EXEMPLES. | 

2. An tu ſcribis? 

A. Næ ego ſcribo 

Ego haud ſcribo 
Q Give me the Rule of this Phraſe.” 
<0. J. When you expreſs 


Tu ne 185 | 


Q. Where dwell the tribes ? 


The tribes dwell her 
Families dwell el 


Q. What any where lives long? 


A ſhadow continues no where 


Q. Whence flit the Schools? 


The Schools flit hence 
A quarrel ariſes thence 


Q. Whither fly the birds p 


The ſparrow flies _ 


Q. When come ſhowers ? 


Showers fell yeflerday 
Winter roared long ags 

T ſaw hail long finc 

Snaw falls now | + 
Frofts will follow flraight 


Q. Do ſtars tumble ever? 


A ftar.will never fall 


Q. How oft have you read Matt hero ? 


We bave ragd Matthew once 


The Boys hope read Marſ twice 


Ie have blotted books often 
Thou uſeft to play always 
LS: f * 2 


* 


2. Luduntne puer1 ? 
A. Pueri quidem ludunt 


Prepoſition 


verb or Pre- 


2s 


* * 
4 2 8 
. 


83 


"= mn" 4 


4 —— — 2 — * * _ 
— Oy" DIE * 33 


x 
4 Sigh —— 
SB 
— Sk 


3 — * 
. . 


. 85 

| FS 

4 0 . n 1 
3 WP * 


77 
116 
N 

$ 


| 
} 
| 
| 
,.Þ 
't Þ 


— 


2. Quomodo homines loquuntur? Q. How do boys play? 


84 Bentences. The Sixth Phzafe, Chap. X17 


CY 
— 
ut 


= | 


A. Lucas loquitur temere A. John plays raſply 

Nos loguimur fruſtra | Fames endeavours in vain 
Turba ſatur ſimul Peter and Paul play togel e- 
Tu i præ J will go hefore 
Ego ibo pone Come thog after 


= $. VI. The Sixth Phzaſe. 

Q What is the fixth Phraſe ? 

561. A. The Prepoſition in the former Phraſe ever ſignifies a 2 
ſomething : as, If you go before, you go before ſomething ; If I come ain, 
1 come after ſomething. Now the Sixth Phraſe will teach you how right 
to expreſs that thing; as, 

Go thou before me . T will come afte®rhee 

Q. Which are the two Words related to each other in this Phraſe? 

562. A. The fiſt is a Prepoſition, as jet down by the fifth Phraſe, 

The ſecord is the Subſtantive Name of the hing it points at. 

Q Give me ſome EXEMPLES to make this plain. 

6s. 4-1 - | 
Ego eo ad templum | Tu ſtas ante oſtium 
Miles jacet intra palatium Eelſe ſt / uuntur apud forum 

Q. bich is the RULE of the fixth Phrase? 

564. A. To expreis the regards of one thing to another. 

I. Put down a Prepoſition according to the former Rule. 

II. To it put the Name of the thing it points at, in the right Caſe, 

Q. bat doth this Rule teach new ? | 

565. A. Only to put the Subſtant. after the Prep. in its right Caſe, 

Q. Which is the right Caje after the Prepaſction ? 


566. AJ. 1. After the firſt 27 Prepoſitions the 3 th 


SSF 
wo 2 IV CC 


a — 
233 
EY 
az 


ww td 


2 2 
922 Ta = 


8 
p * 
2 


—— 


SQ — 


2. After the next 12 the Ablative Caſe right 
3. After the laſt 4 ſometimes the Accuſ. and ſometimes the Abl. YC, 


& in -Þ. W2 Fo 
„ . =, TS, Form = 


WWW 


567. &. I. The firſt 27 Prepoſitions. N. 372. hart 
| after them an Acculative Caſe, 


1 Cardo ſtridet ad januam = The keeper lies at the door 
Aurora vocat ancillam 2 colum Tye evening calls boys to bed 

2 Bellum geritur adver/us hoſtes Exerciſe this fear towards Gi 

- Cucumer venditur ud forum Tables are bought at the Torn.” 

4 Tenebræ non migrant az? lacem Fleſb is dreſſed before the fire 

& Aula patet ei culinam The kitchen lies behither 72 H 

6 Turres videntur citra arcem A caſtle is ſeen behither the tut 

7 Ville jacent circum urbem A wall is put about the fields 

8 Pulices ſaliunt circa cameram A flea leap; about ;be walls 

Tu nch offendere contra leges Faults were made againit a 

10 Amor exercetur erga parentes Carry thyſelf wel! coward 

{1 Greges paicunturextra oppidum Mer fred a flock ut ithob 

12 Sanguis falit /nirg venas he veins urs wishin 


— — 
— 0 


— 
2 


2 
CN 


n * s. 


* £ 
2 | 


qi Chap. XVI. Dentences. Lhe Sixth Phzaſe. 2 83 


by 73 Crura ornantur infra genua The beel is placed beneath the leg 
1 Powa ſparguntur ixter puèros Divide ye the money among the girls 
15 Boves arant juxta pagum The fijhes ſwim by the mill 
10 Pœænæ debentur 00 ſcelera Boys are beaten for foults 
|. Honor eſt penes Regem Honours have been with Kings | 
18 Tu tallis magiſtrum per miniſtrum Ve deceive tbe mother by the daughter . 
Canes venantur per valles A dog hunts through the valley 
10 Lepus jacebat pone arcam The doe lurks behind the wood 
20 Ego ero apud ze po? menſem Vie will be with yqu after an hour 
411 Heru⸗ tribuit potum præter cibu Ma/ters give bread beſide fl:/þ 
4 22 Virtũs debet coli proper ſe Do thou obey for love i 
kW Eso legi hiſtorian ſecundum Mare. Exemples are made according to art 
1 24 Arbor creſcit ſecus callem A roje grey by the lake 


| 25 Cornua tolluat ſe ſupra verticem The head lifts itſeſf above the horns 
20 Grona portantur 74 oceanum Swallows fly over the Sea. 
; 27 Glona miznebit altra vitam Puniſhment Ku beyond death 


568. $. II. The next 12 Prepoſitions, Ne, 373. have 
an Ablative Caſe after them, | 


N. B. Ab before a Vowel, A before 4 conſonant; and juſt ſo ex and e. 
Ego novi te à capite ad calcem The wa/l will defend us from the ſhower 


Panes coquuntur à populo The head is combed by the maid 
: 4ijque arte ſi eſſet nos moreremur Were it not for you we ſhould play 
3 Tu indue paſllum cum tunica We pat on the coat with the cloak. 
ie, 4 Mures lingunt butyr. coram coquo Scholars laugh before the Maler 
| ; Eto duxt uxorem clan Patre Wives are taken unknown to Fathers 
e | © Murmur auditur de luco We hear murmurs out of the tab 
| Mulieres garriunt de ſupellectile A woman 0ill prate of a gooje 
's 00888 Nihil fit -x nihilo | Glaſſes may be made of aſhes | 
ng 8 Tu noli meiere palam populo Do not thou pray before the rabble 
Ci: © Bilznz agunt haleces pre ſe A wolf drives the ſeep before him 
Femora tremunt præ timore The heart leaps for jiy. 3 
121 10 Gentes colunt imaginem pro Deo u count an ounce for a pound 
11 Schola non regitur ine cura Schools can't be ruled without a Maſter 


1 Vos odiſtis ſcelèra verbo zenus Cover the breaſt up to the neck. 


569. $; III. Theſe four Prepoſitions, In, ſub, ſuper, and 
/uvter, when they denote motion into or towards a thing, 
have an Accuſative Caſe, otherwiſe an Ablative. 


; Tu divide ſyllabam ix literas Ne divide words into ſyllables 
LVVeges folent ſedere 7x throno Jervels uſe to be put in a crown 
2 Mappa cecidit ab cathedram The knives are fallen down under? 
Cutter jacet ia diſco The diſhes lie under the napkins table 
3 Vermis nzſcitur /ubter terra Worms live under ground 
Vulpes current „iter collem Fiſbès run in under banks i 


I non debes cubare /aper herum The maſter fits above the mi/rejs 


„er loquitur faper mitrumentis Women talk about the Kitchin 


2 


- 
1 
3 


8 
| 


2 


. 


* 


5 
nn 
2 - Q 
— 
[2 ae. = 


— ON ca oans. — xs TS . 
8 : Ge. carte, 


— = i PR N 
. — = \ 
— > N . 0 —— 
l — ELSE anti oY 5 hoc. — ae Sen EET 
* — — — 2 — 
, 


Tap. 


go pa 
Ancilla 
Locuſt⸗ 
Vos ſer 
raude: 
Waves 7 
bore 
uga pr 
Pecuni; 
3581. 
ive n 
7 ſent l 
V hat 


36s Dentences. The Seventh Phzaſe, Chap. X11 


Q Ls there any thing yet to be noted about this Sixth Phraſe ? 
570. A. Note 1. That the Accuſative of the Gerund in Dan may be 
uſed after Ad, Ante, Inter, Ob, Proprer ; as, 

Exercitus alitur ad vincendum hoſtes Horſes rave before taming 
Nos lambimus jus inter edendum Cry not out in dining time 
Ego veni propter defendendum te Ju came for to puniſh us 

571. Note 2. That the Ablative Caſe of the Gerund in Dan may be 
uſed after 4, ab, abs, de, e, ex, cum, in, pro; as, 

Pueri terrentur a diſcendo Dogs will not be frighted from barkin 
Vos facitis verba de lavando Ye make delays about painting 
Pcenz oriuntur ex temere agendo Praiſe till ariſe from ſtudying 

572. Note 3. That the natura! place of the Prepoſ. is next before its Caſe 
But 1. Sometimes the Prepoſition is ſet before the Verb and compound. 


o 
— 


ut ZE „ 


* 
eg = — = PS. 


ed with it. As . 

Aves adeunt nidos, 1. e. eunt ad The Biſhop goes to the Church 3 

Dux anteit milites, i. e. it ante Leaders will go before the Army agil 

Ego detrudo navem ſaxo Ships are thraſt from the ſtones Feleſt 
573. N. B. Cum is let after me, te, ſe, gui, nobis, vobis, quibus. f 

Nuicum vos cupitis vivere? With whom dof8 thou deſire to pla)? 

Ego cupio vivere tecum Wilt thou dine with me ? 

Tu ſperas ambulare mecum The Scholars did breakfaſt with us 


$. VII. The Seventh Phzaſe. 


Q. Which is the Seventh Phraſe? | 

574. A. The Seventh Phraſe is to ſhew that what is, does, or is done, i, 
521, or is done to or tor ſomething, that is, to its uſe, gain or loſs. 

Q IVhichti are the two Words that make this Phraſe ? 

575. A. The firſt is a Verb ſet down by the ſecond Phraſe. 

The ſecond is a Subſtantive of the Dative Caſe; as, I write for jou. 
N B. Here the Engliſh before the Subſtantive uſe 0 or for according to 
the Sixth Phraſe. But in Latin they uſe a Dative Caſe. 

Q. Give me ſome EXEMPLES of this. 

576. A. 

Locus fuit conſilio Tu fregiſti nuces ſimiæ | Nux datur ſimiis 
Pax erit eccleſiæ Anna. ſervat baccas ſibi | Baccæ ſervantur vobis 
Q. Which is the RULE of the Seventh Phraſe? 

$77: A. When you are to expreſs that ſomething 7s, does, or is dint 
10 or /or a thing, i. e. to its gain or loſs. 

I. Put down the Verb according to the Second Phraſe. 

II. Add to it the name of that thing in the Dative Caſe. 

Or, All manner of Verbs put Acquiſitively will have a Dative Caſe. 
Q. What mean you by Verbs put Acquilitively ? 

578. A. Then is a Verb put Acquiftively, when by it is expreſſed that Wi - 
ſome good or bad is acguired, or got 10 or for ſomething. 5 


What doth this Rule teach you more than you learned kifre? 8 
579. 4. Only to put a Dative Caſe to a Verb put Aeguiſitivel)? 4 


Q. * me ſore IMITATIONS of tbe Seventh Phraſe. Ts 2 
g80. A. | | 


0 1 2 


beg XVI. Sentences. The Eighth Phaſe. 87 


go pandam fencitram muſcis Do not thou open the windows to the wind 
Heil molit ſrugem familiæ Mules grind peas for the men-ſervants 
Locuſta quærit ſibi cibum Locuſls ſeek to themſelves dew 

os ſemper cedite parentibus Parents do not give way to ſons 

Fnudes non pariunt homini laudem Deceit brings glory to no body 

Rores arant agros hominibus A bullock plows a field for the King 
bores augentur diſcipulis Labour is increaſed to the Maſter 


5 — 


be Nies promuntur tauris A yoke ſhall be brought out for coevs 
:cunia numeratur diacono Iwill number the ounces to the Biſhop 
si. N. B. 1. To #s of? left out in Engliſh as eafily underfoad ; as, g 
Wire ne the Cup, for te me You anfeoer them nothing ; 
4 ſent the Doctor a guinea { wrote you a Letter : 


V have caught you a bird, i. e. for you I will tell the Maſter this 

682. N. B. 2. Theſe following have a Dative, though the Engliſh of thers 

en, to be Tranſitive, becauſe to cannot be well ſupplied | : 

Civitas credit Magiſtratibus Magiſtrates believe the Citizens | 
Nlagiſtratũs fidunt Ci vitati Cities truſt the Magiſtrates 
Cccleſia favet Epiſcopo The Biſhops favour the Churches. 

E 5: Studere, nocere, mederi, obedire, parcere, &c. have a Dat. 

| 583. N. B. 3. The Interjections En, ecce, hem, hei, ve, are ſometimes put | 
Icguiſitively, for Verbs with their Nominative, and have a Dative Caſe. 
Hem tibi Petrum Hei mihi Lo a flable for horſes 

In altaria ſoli Vz vobis Behold a den for lions 

Ecce templum Luna Here's Fohn for you Alas for us | 


F. VIII. The Eighth Phzaſe, 


| N 
Cat is the Eighth Phraſe zo expreſs ? | | ö 
584. 4. The Eighth Phraſe is to expreſs that one thing is the thing of j 
(other; as, The Book of the Maſter. | | | 
| Q. Which are the two words related to each other in this Phraſe? | 
585. 4. The Firſt is a Subſtantive of any Caſe as ſet down by any of ; 
he former Rules. = | _— | 
| The ſecond is alſo a Subſtantive of the Genitive Caſe, telling oh or | 
[ what the other thing is. | 
N. B. Ir Engliſh either tue put the Prepoſition of before the latter Subſlantivs 4 
be ſixth Phraſe, or put es or 's after it; and ſet it before the otber; as, by 
ne Book of the Maſter, or, The Maſter's Book: The Peace of the Church, z 
The Church's Peace. | 

But in Latin the Genitive Caſe is deſigned to ſigniſie the ſame. | 

Q Give me ſome EXEMPLES of the Eighth Phraſe. | — 
586. 4. A Genitive is thus added to the Subſtantive: | | | 
irt Ph. O ſtella cœli. Heus fili Reginæ. | | 
| "Second Ph. Pars maris fervet. Jecur beſtiarum voratur. | 
bird Ph. Ego ſum membrum Chriſti. Tu es dux ſcholæ 
WW *urth Ph. An tu legiſti epiſtolas Pauli? Tu tenes caudam aſini. 
If ith Ph, Canes cubant ad oſtium domũs. Ros ſtat in vertice roſa. 
„ enth Ph. Nos damus gloriam Domino mundi. | | F 
ie me the RULE to direct me to make the file, 4 | 1 


i; 


: 
1 


Z 


hat 


1 


— — 


N , ——— 1 * . = . ” — 6 5 1 : 
— — . 3 QD2Lͤœ—2—2i ͤ ͤwS—kt— ᷣ —'᷑ꝛ.— — VX —— — D » 3 n 


CS 
LY . 
9 
5 
k 
_ 
=: 
"+; i 
1 * 
1 1 
\ 3 . 
2 
1, 4 
* | 
Ft 
4 
4 
43118 
4 '2 
3.4 *z 
14 
1 
{ 2 * 
3 
| \ If 
i% 3 
” 12 
4 : 
2 1 i . 
l F 
' 1 
in | 
7 i 
"I 1 
þ 
1 1 
bg 1. x 
1 
4 * 
17 l 
9! 5 
N x 
; +. & 
>», 
; 
7 
l 1 
4 s þ 
19 : 
: 
"2 
5 
1 
N 
+I 
1 
4 : 
7 
| 1 
5 1 
1 
it] 
4 
* 


1 % 
. 
. 
5 
1 
4 þ 
T3, 
19 
1 
Th 
, 
= 


3 


88 Sentences. The Ninth Phꝛale. Chap. NUN 


587. A. Toſhew a thing to be the thing gf another thing 
I. Put down a Subſtantive according to the former Rules. 00 
II. Add to it the ſecond Subſtantive in the Genitive Caſe. 0 


Or, When two Subſtantives come together, the latter ſhall be in | 
Genitive Caſe, if the one ſignify the thing of the other. | 

Q. What doth this Rule add to what I have learned before? 

588. 4. To put to a former Subſtantive another in the Genitive Cat. 


Q. Give me ſome matter for IMITATION. SH 
589. A. 1. A Genitive put to the Subſtantive of each Pbraſe. | ö | 
1. O duces populi | O tongue of Angels | 
O cives Londini O Sons of the Church 1 
2. Cura juris decet hominem The care of works adorns the nn | « 
Preces fidei valent apud Deum The prayers of hope drive away ferm 4 
3. Nomen eſt ſignum rei Words are the names of t bings | | | 
Horæ ſunt partes diẽi A day is a part of a month XL 
4. Mors tollit gaudia ſenius Joys take away the dread if gui J 
Palatum ſentit ſaporem fellis The dug bath plenty of milk of 
6. Ego accuſo te de crimine luxus Thou accuſe? me of the crime if anger | 
Adamas micat inter lapides litoris Diamonds glitter among jewel if th . 
crown | 
Sudor fluit per canales cutis Blood will flow through avein if th ju 55 
7. Tu ne fide auxilio hoſtis We do not truſt to the help if a fl 4 
Tu dic laudes Domino ætheris Sing thou praiſe to the Lord of lift 1 
590. N. B. 1. Seldom the Verb Infinite is the Genitive Caſe; as, 6. 
Tempus eſt ſolvere colla equorum 7 is not time to looſe the School a, 
Eſt tibi ſtudium tueri arcem We have a defire to ſow the param *S 
591. N. B. 2. But moſtiy the Genit. of the Gerund in dum is thu ju ul 
Odium diſcend1 cepit vos Boys ſhow an hatred of knowing Is 
Tu facito finem ludendi The end of finning is death ( 
eren Fit mihi otium ſcribendi I there not leiſure to plant? 
NK: | 
$. IX. The Ninth Phaſe. - 
Q. Whith is the ninth motien to be made towards making a Sentence? 6 
£92. A. Sometimes the Subſtantive in the former Rules doth not uf FR 
ently expreſs the thing meant by it, and then there is need to ado an 13 
net Subſtantive which may more fully declare and explain it; and ti 0 0 
the Ninth Phraſe. | 7 1 
Q Which then are the two words of the Ninth Phraſe ? 5 5 
593. A. The firſt is a Subſtantive ſet down by one of the former Rule 0 
The ſecond is another Subſtantive denoting the ſame thing added tk | 
Q_ Give me ſome EXEMPLES to mate this plain. 
4. A. Thees x ſecond Subſtantive is added to the Subſtintive. / i. 
OF the Hr Ph. O Rex Carole. He thot calls the King, coils Cui, Ding 
Cf the Second Ph. Rex Cafotys regnat. If the Kino reipns, Charts l 1 5 


te Third Ph. Ille eſt Rex Carolus. I he be King. be i, Cb 
the Furth b. Amo regem C rolum. I /ope the King, IU. 
Of the $ex1h Ph. Ego lauer de Reps Carco. IF Z ſpend 7 
ſprikiof CGonr tr. | . 


„ * 


*J 


a 9 p 4 * — - : * — . ooze 
„ % ⁰_ůW . lt CO a Woo AER 5 tf 1 re UB 77 
* [ = n 


n 
ES 


Of the SoenthPh. Tu pare Regi Carolo. 1f you obey the King, you obey Charles 
b Of the Eighth Ph. Ego vidi thronum Regis Caroli. The throne of the King 

is the throne of Charles. | | 
t And therefore the latter Subſtantive is ſtill put in the ſame Caſe that the 
ſomer was in. N. B. So that the firſt Subftantive's right Caſe muft be known 

before this Phraſe can be uſed ; and therefore this Phraſe is the Ninth. 

0s Q. Give me the RULE of tbe Ninth Phraſe. | 
| c95. 4. To ſhew what thing a thing is, | FEY 
I. Set down the firſt Subſtantive according as the former Rules direct— 


: 


II. Put to it another Subſt. denoting the ſame thing in the ſame Caſe. , /*3-} 
| Or, Two Subſtantives denoting one thing ſhall he put both in one Caſe. © 
Q Give ms ſome IMITATIONS. 7 Fs | 
5096. 4. — - | 
. 5 Domine Deus, tu bea eccleſiam O father 3 thou God 


d Jeſu Chriſte, tu fove populum O wife Eve, follow thou virtue _ 
1. Dominus Magiſter vetat garrire The Gent. the Miſtreſs forbids to rove 1 


Domina Hera vellit piſa The Ladies, the Miſftreſſes pluck Roſes 
. Malus eſt arbor = Apple Trees are trees | 
F Ador putatur far Salt is thought a mineral 


N. B. And here you ſee the reaſon why in the zd Phraſe the ſecond Subſt. 

i put into ths ſame Caſe with the firſt, becauſe one is ſaid to be the other. 
} | 4. Ego legebam Paulum Apoſtolum I was hearing Henry the Biſhop 
u ſeris granum ſemen frugis Wa. faw grains the jeeds of wheat 

6. Tu rogas de bibliis lege vitæ We ſpeak of the bible the word of God 

| Tucave a Diabolo hoſte animz Coft an eye io the skie the place of ar- 
7. Tu funde preces Deo Regi Than gaveſt a reward to the Lord Fudge 
| Ego mifi premium Joanni fratri Spare thou the Soul the temple of God 
8. Maria fuit filia Regis Henrici Charles ꝛwas the ſon of King Charles 
Cives ſunt gloria urbis Londini Lo the end of vices the diſeaſes of ſouls. 

Las 


S. X. The Tenth Phꝛale. 1 
H . What is the Tenth Phraſe ? | 


| 597. A. When we are to expreſs that the thing mentioned by any Sub- 
ffantive of the foregoing Rules is /zch or ſuch, then we put to it an Ad- 


alive; as, a man is good or bad, wile or fooliſh, and this is the Tenth Phraſe, © 1 


1 
4 


| Q Which then are the two words of the Tenth Phraſe ? | 
98 A. The Firſt is a Subſtantive of any Caſe, put by a former Rule, 
he Second is an Adjective added to that Subſtantive. 4 
| Q Give me ſome EXEMPLES of this. * | ; 
599. A. Exemples where an Adjective is joined to that ubſtantive of | 


: i. ph. \ © Domine bone X O Domini boni | 
1 81 O Domina bona » Plur. O Dominæ bonæ ö 
rl Ig. J i 
1 O pomum bonum O Poma bona | 
1 2. Ph. Dominus bonus amatur Domini boni coluntur | 
Domina bona laudatur Dominæ bonz quæruntur ? 
Pomum bonum voratur Poma bona eduntur | . 


* 4 
* * „ 
ol 

* 


„„ . 


fot 3 £ % AJ 
- - 


90 


6. Ph. ¶ mori pro Domino bono 
Quis & lugere cum Domina bona 
vult E prandere fine pomo bono 


7. Ph. Ego placeo Domino bono 


Tu noces Dominz bonæ 


Natura dat ſaporem pomo bono Dentes non parcunt pomis bonis 


8. Ph.Ego credo verbis Domini boni Non eſt C Dominorum bonorum 
Tu verris palliumDominz bonz nobis Dominarum bonarum 
Naſus ſentit odorem pomi boni 


N. B. Where all along you ſee the AdjeRt. is put into the fame Gender 30 
the ſame Caſe, and the ſame Number that the Subſtantive 7s of. 

2. Therefore the Rule of the Adject. is not to be taught till the right Cik 
of the Subſt. be known, and that was not before now. 

Q. Give me the RULE of the Tenth Phraſe. 

600. A. To ſhew a thing to be fuch or ſuch. | 

J. Put down the Subſt. name of that thing by the former Rules. 

II. And to it add the Adj. in the ſame Caſe, ſame Gender, and Number, 

Or, The Adjective, whether it be a Noun, Pronoun or Participle, ſhal 
agree with its Subſtantive in Caſe, Gender and Number. 

Q. Give me ſome IMITATIONS for exerciſe. 


601. A. 


O Deus zterne, tu ſemper manes 
O fortuna mala, tu lædis homines 
O omnes nationes, ne eſte brutæ 

Homines juvenes ſpernunt ſenes 


N. B. Sometimes there comes a Verb between them, and ſtill they agrti. 


Sepia ſolet eſſe nigra 
Papyrus debet eſſe alba 
Miz olive ſunt grate 


Filum novum larcit pannum veterem Nee threads patch old clothes 


Linea reQa ſecat lineam curvam , 
Res dubiæ movent mentem fortem 
Selopus pellit pilam gravem 
Tunica longa verrit humum 

Acer miles haud metuit necem 
Frons blanda arguit gaudium 
Solus homo elt animal nudum 
Leo habet vim miram 

Fama vana turbat civitatem 

'Toga parva non eſt onus magnum 
Q. Quot ſunt res in natura rerum? 
ER. Unus eſt maximus Deus 

Sexus anitnalium funt duo 

Tres ſunt teſtes in cœlo alto 


ys 


Sentences. The Tenth Phꝛaſe. Chap. XI 


4. Ph. Ego optavi Dominum bonum Ego invito Dominos bonos 
f Tu ſperaviſti Dominam bonam Tu vocas Dominas bonas 
Mus quæſivit pomum bonum Sus quærit poma bona 


Quis nolit cedere Dominis bonis 


Nemo queritur de Dominis bonis 
Ades ornantur a Dominis bonis 
Corpora aluntur a pomis bonis. 


Tu deles maculas Dominis bonis 


copia? Pomorum bonorum 


LU 
: Ne 

O eternal Angels, ye ever abide | 
O evil ſpirits, ye hurt ſouls | C 
O every Nation, fear thou wars re 


An old man ſcorneth a young man 


We jee that ittk 7s black 
ie know that Paper ought to be whilt 
A ripe olive is acceptable 


A crooked line cuts a ſtreight line 
A dubious matter moves flout minds 
Guns will ſend forth heavy bulitts 
Long coats ſrocep the fireets 
Death frights not a brave ſoldia 
Joy makes a blithe forehead 
Only men are naked animals 
There is wonderful force in à lion 
Vain fables trouble cities 

Small gowns are not great burden, 
Q How many things are there heref 
A. There is one Quemn in a Kings 
The parts of the bible are tuo 
Tie King governs jy hr King 


95 « $24 
> 04 dvd 


—— 


jap, XVI. Sentences. The Tenth Phaſe. 


irtes anni ſunt quatuor The fides of a Church are four 
.nſas animalis ſunt quinque There are five fingers. on one band 
entum anni dicuntur ſeculum An age holds an hundred years | 
bz manus jam ſunt laſſæ Both feet are now tired 
eo eft rex beſtiarum ferarum A. ſheep is the meat of a wild beaſt 


, Quotus diſcipulus es tu? Q. Of what number am I F; 

Ego ſum diſcipulus primus A. Thou art the firſt girl E 8 
annes eſt ſecundus Martha ought to be ſecond | ay, 
obertus heri erat tertius Betty deſerves to be third 


Jona hora invitat ad jentaculum Breakfafts are taken at.the ninth hour 
602. N. B. Vhen in Engliſh we by this Rule uje an Adjective with am, the 
Lin oft expreſs both by one Verb; as, 


GI Ego frigeo Jam filent Ego ſileo Verbs 
(ber Ego caleo ] Jam glad Ego gaudeo Neuter 
603. F. II. The Pronouns Adjective. 
uis homo poteſt ſecare ſilices? What knives can cut pumices? 
e locus eſt profanus Thoſe places are prophane 
1s ec charta non eſt pura Theſe paper; are not pure 
en folium habet florem dulcem The ſame leaves have ſweet flowers 
Inzdam ſpatia ſunt auguſta Some altar, are large | 
hac ſtirpe non eſt frons ulla In theje flocks there are not any leaves 
| Utram genam cupis fricare? J/hich hand do you-defire to ſcratch ? 
Neutrum genu eſt claudum Neither band hath been found 
Itera gena erit fricanda T ſee the other hand lame | 
; Cujus eft hic culter ? Whoje Knives judge ye theſe to be be? 
Tu ſeis hunc cultrum eſſe meum 7 think that that torch is mine 
- bk fax non poteſt eſſe tua All thoſe knives are yours | 


604. F. III. The Participles Adjective. 


1. In ans, ens, or iens, being or doing | 
ter amans habet amantem filium Loving fathers have loving ſons 
bs audivimus magiſtrum docentem The Maſter ſaw us learning | 

2. In andus, endus, or iendus, to be done, that ought to be done, 


b us puer eſt laudandus Good girls are to be praiſed | 
p negas pulicem eſſe prendendum I deny that moles are to be caught 
; SET 3. In arus, about to be, or about to do. | 
o ſum iturvs in ſcholam Me are about to go into the town 
 ſumus pranſuri apud te Ye are to ſup with me 1 
. In f or ſus, In Engliſh in 4, F or u, done already, or being done, 
| or having done, or having been done. 
5 dmo doctus terit multos libros Learned men wear away many papers 
% WT 7 abvita ſolatur animum The ſound of harps heard is ſweet. 
aun 


1 


395 «$24 
> 4 dvd 


„ 1 frgni fie Perfectly, you muſt uſe the Parti 
L lus or Xus, With the Vers elle; as, Jy 5 fp 4 


Bri) Ego poſſum J am well, firong Ego valeo See the 


we _ Co AA Mac? es 
as is. . "AY * * io ** y N 4 = 


2 
*# 


1 


* 


Pa. -Senfences. The Eleventh Phaaſe. | Chap. 2 


Amari to be loved, amatog eſſe or fuiſſe to * been loved. 5 
Doceri 70 be taught, doctus elle or fuiſſe to have been tau br. 
Legi 10 be read, lectus eſſe or fuiſſe to have been re, 
Audiri zo be heard, auditus eſſe or fuiſſe io have been bears. 


Præterperfect Tenſe Præterplup. Ten, 
Ego amatus ſum J have been liked Ego habitus eram 
Tu probatus es Thou haft been efleemed Tu doctus eras 
Arbor plantata eſt A Port has been ſhut Litera lecta erat 
Nos nati fuimus We have been frighted Nos viſi eramus 
Vos petiti fuiſtis e have been planted Vos capti eratis 
Porte clauſe fuẽrunt Laws have been made Templa ſtructa erant 


Future Perf. Ego amatus ero vel fuero 7 Shall have been loved, kt. 
606. So in Verbs Deponents fignify ing Actively. | 
Loqui #9 /peak, Locutus eſſe or fuiſſe 2% have or bad ſpoken 
Labi to /i5, , Lapſus eſſe or fuiſſe 10 have or had flipt = 
Mirari to wonder, Miratus effe or fuifle to have. or bad wondered 
Præterperfect. Præterplup. 

Ego locutus ſum I have endeavoured. Ego greſſus fueram 
Tu miratus es Thou haſt flipped Tu miſſus fueras 
Coquus mentitus elt The Sun has riſes, Minſter meditatus fuent 
Nos lapfi ſumus We hanelyed Nos fati fueramus 
Vos conati eftis Te? have wondred Vos ſaſſi fueratis 
Stellæ ortæ ſunt Apes have ſpoken Epiſcopi precati fuerant 


E x1. I. The Eleventh Phzafe. 


Q. Which is the Eleventh Phraſe ? : 

607. A. As Adv. and Prep. are joyned to Verbs by the V. Phra, b 
may they be to Adjett. or Adverbs; as, A man very good. 

Q. Which are the tro Words in this Phra e? 

608 A. The I. is an Adject. or Subit. or Adverb ſet down by tle {ot 
mer Rules, the II. is an Adverb or Prepoſition added to it. 

N. B. So that all ivat you learn by the Eleventh Phraſe is 15 put an Aint 
or Prepofition i ſome wwrd going before. 

Q Give me the EXEMPLES gf bis. 

60 — 
Selin 2 ar arbor haud alta Tu habes uxorem vix ſanam 
Senes ſunt bis pueri Nemo vivit liber à curis 

Q. Which-is the RULE f the Eleventh Phraſe ? 

610. A. As Adverbs and Prepoſitions are joined to Verbs, ſo are tit} 
to Adjectives, Subſtantives and Adverbs; as, 

Pauèi puexi ſunt ſemper læti Few wives are i mild 
Omnes ſexe ſunt ſobrii Autaſi all Churches are largt 
Tu habes fratrem vix virum Be not cruel towards any animal 2 
Bos facet feſſus de via | Dogs are fierce againſt bears 
Quercus ſtat procul a ſtabulg The able fluad far from the oi 


"lf 
6, V. 


C 


Wi 


* 


— — 


2 e 


$. XII. The Twelfth Phzaſe, 


Q 1s us ſee now the twelfth Hep towards making a Sentence... | 
611. p* 7 The twelfth Phraſe is juſt like the ſeventh, and is uſed whah 
|, we are to expreſs that a thing is ſuch, or ſuch to, or foz any thing; 26g 
4 child is dear to the Father. Learning is uſeful to boys. | 
Q. Which are the two words in the T. welfth Phraſe? | 
612. A. The I. is an Adject. ſet down by the tenth Rule. | 
The II. is a Subſt, of the Dative Caſe added to it. | 
Q What doth this teach more than ] knew before ? 
A. Only to put a THPLE after an Adjective put . 


Q. Give me the a 
613. A. 15 


puer eſt charus parenti \ 

Literæ ſunt utiles pueris => Vo 

| Q Give me the RULE. CE IJ 

614; 4. When you exp that'a king is /uch,or ſuch to, or for another, 

Put down the Adjettive according to the Tenth Rule. 

% Put to it the Subſtantive name of that thing in the Dative Caſe. - 
, AdjeCtives that betoken pzofit or diſpzofit, likeneſs | pr unlike- 

neſs, c. require a Dative Caſe; as, 

$ Chriſtus eſt bonus anime piæ Thunderbolts are not good to men 

75 erlt ſimilis amanti patri Devils are like to roaring lions 


1 
1 
| 


int 


Hordeum habetur gratum Caibus 
Labores ſunt moleſti 5 


* iir pius nam eſt diſſimilis filio They are not unlike to fierce ſerpents 
A Libra eſt par duodecem unclis Troelve ounces are equal to @ pound 
| Tuſiis non eſt levis pueris 347 he plague is no light thing tous 
| Szvi viri ſunt mites nemini A mild man is cruel to none 


An tu putas hoſtem amicum hoſti? Can enemies be friendly to enemies r 
Publica res eſt communis omnibus Pu#/ick things are common to each ont 
Rex habet hortum proprium fibi Kings have thrones proper to them. 


$. XIII. The Thirteenth Phzaſc, | 
Q What is the Thirteenth and laft Phraſe? 15 


hath after it a Genitive Caſe ; as, A man greedy of money. 1 

Q. Which then are the two words related to one another here ® _. 

616. 4. The I. is an Adject. ſet down by the Tenth Rule, 

The II. is a Subſt. of the Genitive Caſe put to it; as, | 
Milites debent eſſe gnari armorum. Hie puer eſt rudis literarum. 

Q. What AdjeRives are they that govern a Genitive Caſe ? 

617. 4. Not all Adject. have a Gen. Caſe, but only thoſe that ſigniſie, 
1. (Ale, as, potis, compos, potens, 46e. Patiens able to bear 
2. or Unable, as impos, impotens, anable. Impatiens unable to bear: 
T5 Knowing, as, certus, doctus, peritus, KIgful. Memor minaful. - 

or Ignorant, as, incertus, indoctus, imperitus, me rudis. 

2. Defirous, as, amans, avirus, greedy. Cupidus, covetors. 

C Or Regardleſs, as, largus, negligens, negligent. Prodigus prodigat. 
* Now give me the RULE of the Thirteenth Phraſe, | C 4 

18, 


are the! 


al 


Fl. 


*. 


V. Chap. XVI. Hententes. The XII, XIII. phzaſes: 5 7 


big. 4. The thirteenth Phraſe is like the eighth, andis when an Adject. 
> 
1 


0 
"3; 
*3 

* 
* 


—— — — 


E 


94 Simple Sentences, Chap. Xvll. Ne 
618. A. To declare 7 Able fe 8 8 15 — 75 12 


of any M 


that any thing is & Unable & Tor Ignorant Regardleſs C thin t 
I. Put down the Adjective according to the Tenth Phraſe. 5 b * 
And II. to it put the Subſt. in the Genitive Caſe ; 2 
Or, Adjectives that ſignifie Deſire, Knowledge, Remembzanc,, WM - 
Tgno2ance, and ſuch like, require a Genitive Caſe ; as, ' Q 
Vir ebrius non eſt compos mentis Sober men are maſters of thenſelces 6 
Mulier laſciva eſt impos animi Wanton women are not miſtreſs if . 
their heart | 4 


Verus Deus eſt potens ventorum Falſe Gods have not power of thunder 


Sævi heri ſunt impotentes iræ Fooliſh mothers can't manage their ly; 
Tua filia eſt certa eundi : No man can be ſure of living 

Ego video te eſſe doctum pilæ Boys ought not to be Shill'd at dice 
Duces debent eſſe periti belli The Mater is a 5kilf ul uſer of the bars 


Nos debemus vivere memores mortis 77 ought to be mindful of virtue 
Homines vivunt immemores officii Be not unmindful of the laſt hour 


Vir amans vini eſt prodigus nummi Men lover, of ale are laviſh of gold 
Tu es cupidus novarum rerum Le are covetous of little things 


My. And thus you have ſeen the thirteen Phraſes and their Rules, by 
which Words are put rightly together to make Sentences. 

Sch. Are theſe thirteen ſufficient to guide one in making any Sentence ? 

619. A. They are ſufficient, and comprehend all the ways of putting 
words to words aright in the Latin Tongue. Only obſerve, 

620. N. B. That {ome Verbs Neuter and Paſſive, and ſome Adjectives, hars 
after them a Verb Infinite not vet accounted for; as, | 
go videor videre ſtellam cadentem WW: ſeem to hear trumpets ſounding 


vmpanum dicitur dare ſonum Drums are ſaid to make a noiſe 
*L4is homo poteſt arcere fulmina ie cannot feel ſpirits 
Paeri gaudent tangere fræna Girls rejoice to trim up the head 
Senes non putantur apti regi Young ren are apt to be deceipta 


But of theje an account ſhall be given in the next Book. 


Chap. XVII. Three forts of Simple Sentences. 


Q. OW many ef theſe Phraſes go to make one Sentence ? £ 
621. A. Sometimes one; as, Ego ſto. Tu cubas. Supellex emitut. 
2. Sometimes two; as, O Thoma, tu garris. Homo portat pondus. 
3. Sometimes three; as, O Jeſu, tu ſerva nos. Magnum epulum fit nobis 
4. Sometimes four; as, Fœmina bona eſt rara avis. | 
5. Sometimes hve; as, Stultus homo vix implevit ventrem exilem. 
6. Sometimes ix ; as, Omnis familia non poteſt dormire in uno lecto. 
7, Sometimes ſeven; as, Vaſta poma non vorantur ab hominibus ſanæ mentis, 
8. Sometimes eight; as, Ecclefia exercitus Jeſu Chriſti debet pugnate 
contra hoſtem Diabolum, Wc. 
Q. How many forts of Sentences are there? 
622. A. A Sentence is either ſingle or compounded. 
Q. What is a fingle or ſimple Sentence? | 
623. A. That which hath but one Verb Finite in it; as, 17 
9 41 


7 


2 


Ur. 


15, 


tis, 
nate 


+ 
147! 2 


vile, but the Latins put theirs, non, baud, ne, before it. 
© Q. How many ſorts of ſimple Sentences are there! 


Sentence. 2. An Aſertive Sentence. 3. An Imperative Sentence. 


E Quid eſt lacry ma? What is the name of an horſe? | 
em hominem vocas tu? 

Cale inſtrumentum eſt fiftula? What inſtruments are pipes? 
= Q. What is an Aſſertive Sentence ? | 

627. J. An Aſſertive Sentence is that wherein it is aſſerted that ſome- 
What is or 7s not, doth or doth not, ſuffers or ſuffers not; as, 
EFumus non eſt gratus oculis The eyes cannot bear ſmoak 
Alas venit ante autumnum 
EPulvis non ſeritur pro ſemine Men ſow not jewels for ſeeds 
bat is an Imperative Sentence? 

628. 4. An Imperative Sentence is that wherein it 


hat 20 be or nt to be: to do, or or not to do, &e. as, 
Tu eſto vir ſobrius 


0 Be ye ſober men 
Vos ne eſte barbari Let a woman keep her ſelf chaſte 
Tuer ſervato ſe caſtum 


Ne. but Imperative by ne. 


Q. * AT is a Compounded Sentence? 


| 


| 
1 
] 
] 


Chap. XVIII. Compound Sentences, 95 


In- age 15 ort : Man's age 75 not ſport 150 
tas hominis eſt brevis tas hominis non eſt brevis | 
Hllav thou the guide Follow not thou the guide | 
u ſequere ducem | Tu ne ſequere ducem — | 
bat man condemns himfelf ? What man condemns not bumſelf ? 
Þ Quis homo damnat ſeipſum ? Quis homo non damnat ſeipſum ? 


624. N. B. Where you Jee, I. That every ſingle Sentence is either Affirma- 


tive, as Age 75 ſhort 3 or Negative, as Age 7s not ſhort. 


| 3 
II. That the Engliſh put their Negative Particle not, after the Verb Fi- 


| 
4 
[| 
] 


625, J. Of imple Sentences there be three ſorts: 1. An Interrogation 


Q. What is an Interrogative Sentence? | | 
626, 4. An interrogative Sentence is that by which a Queſt. is asked; as, 


4 


þ 


Which horſe can you manage? 
| 
| 


— 


j 
| 
4 
| 


Autumn will come after ſummer 


| 
. . ' j 
is laid upon ſome- 


| Let a ſparrow be roaſted | 
| 629. N. B. I. Interrogative and Aertive Sentences are made by the Indic. 
Mood; but Imperative Sentences are made by the Imperative. | 


| 
| 630. II. In Interrog. and Imperat. Sentences the Engliſh jet the Nom. (un- 
/ its ſelf be the Interrogative) after the Verb Finite, but the Latins 


| either 
Welore or after. | 


631. III, Interrogative and Aſſertive Sentences are denied by non, haud, 


632. IV. Interrogative Sentences have this mark (?) written after them, 
Id 4ſertive and Imperative this (.] See all this in the former E æemples. 


Chap. XVIII. Of Compeunded Double Sentences. 


033. A. When two ſingle Sentences are joined together by 

Pine Cople or Tie, they ere called a Compound Sentence. 
99 then in the Compound Sentence there is, 

One ſingle Sentence; as, Life is ſhirt, N 
Another ſingle Sentence after it; as, Ar? 15 lng 


Between theſe two a Cople is put to tie them together; as, 


Life 


b 

| 
| 
| 


56 Compound Sentences; Chap. Xyjh 


Life 1 ſhort, and art is long. . Life is ſhort, but art is long. 


Vita eſt brevis, & ars eſt longa. Vita eſt brevis, ſod ars eſt longa, 
634. N. B. After the firſi Sentence this mark (,) is to be written, 
Q. What Words may be the Coples to join two Sentences together ? 
635. 4 There are three forts of Words which are Coples. 
I. A relative Word, which rehearſeth and fetcheth over a foregoing 

Subſtantive again; as, Who, which, that, Qui, quæ, quad. 

II. A comparative Word whereby two things are compared together; u, 


Tantus, quantus ; talis, qualis, tot, quot; tam, quam; ita, ut, &. 


» \ 


III. A Conjunction; as, Et, que, quoque, ſed, vero, &c. 

636. N. B. I. Sometimes there is in the firſt Sentence a Word relating tg 
the Cople, and putting us in mind to expect it; as, both /ifz is ſport, a 
art is long. | | 

Thus ille relates to qui, tantus 20 quantus, tam 29 quam, & 10 &, nequ 
to neque, ayt 70 aut, quamvis 20 tamen, as you ſhall ſee. 

637. IS. The natural place of the Cople is between the two Sentence: 
copled, and it is {ſeldom removed thence; but, 

1. 2uidem is ſet after the firſt Word of its Sentence. 

2. Quogne, autem, vero enim, after the firſt Word of the ſecond Sentence 
3. Rue, ne and ve are moreover adjoined to that firſt Word, as you ſhall ſe, 


638. I. Exemples wherein the Relative is Cople, 


ira Me homo, Ae NN ger ſub ſępe. 2 Ph. 
reed are the men, Which Mi Dauer Maget. 


Alices ſunt muliereg, quas << ores non premunt. 4. Ph. 
Happy is that woman, which Mon grief dess not preſs. 

Nos ſerimus grana adoris, quæ grana aves vorant. 5. Ph. 
Servants ſew the garments, which garments Kings put on. 
Biblia ſunt liber Dei, præ quo libro cæteri libri debent ſperni. 6. P.. 
The Bible is the word of God, in which word we read our duty. 


Pueri fiunt hebEtes, quibus pueris non licet ludere. 7. Ph, 


The boy becomes dull, to which boy no play is given. 

Vir datus eſt Mariz, cujus viri nomen erat Jolephus. 8. Ph, 
A wife was given to Foſeph, which wife's name was Mary. 
Judex non debet plectere homines, antequam peccaverint. 


Me cannot hear your words, before that you ſpeak them. 


Hic annus eſt ſecundus, poſtquam nos cœpimus diſcere. 


I. Gall think my ſelf wretched, after that you ſhall die. 
639. Exemples of a Comparative Cep/c. 


Tantur Rex eſt Carolus, guantus Rex nemo fuit. 
So big men evere the giants, as ſo big, 20 body now is. 4 


5 Emi hodie alem equum, gualem equum t nunquam vendidiſtt, 


T heard to day ſuch a ſermon, as you never heard in your lift. 
Tot erant Apoſtoli, guot erant Tribus Iſraelis. | 

So many Miniſters ought to be, as there are-Churches, 

Tam dulce eſt Saccharum, quam amarum eſt fel. 


* 
2 c N * n 2. nds * — » 1 "In 12 > 4 
n R N 8 8 e * R a 8 Eee 
JJ ̃ ĩ²Můꝑ . ] ³ 1A ] o t ALA —ꝝaꝛiũ Gros dr 5 W 4 


Se OY AE TR ERR IRA 1 l 
; h 
nn MÞ>/2, 2 ty + tm. 


. FO Aa a 


lay 
— 


Ip XVINT; Compound Senfentes. 


97 


VII. 
— 


80 pious 045 Abel, as Cain was impious. 


a. 


egoing 


ler 3 


I 


ting tg 
rt, and 


neque 


ntences 


ntence; 
hall lee 


le, 


F Ego it % ut pater juſſit. Ve 


. Pl. 


fter ut or ati fignifying that, 
after ut or atinam ſignify ing O 


I. Alway 
* 93 


Ego cœnem 
Tu jentes ® 
Axis erret 
Nos lavemus 
Vos juretis 
Canes jatrent 


Res po- 
ſeit ut 
5 


643 In the Ene 
94 Ego narem 
. Pu ululares 
Quis fuit J Columbus voleret 77/2 crore 
die cum Sos erraremus ere when 
| Vos ploraretis 
Lyre ſonarent 
4 (> 
: 


* 2 
* 4 
2 


Solomon fuit ſapientior, guar ali reges ſunt. ; 
I The giants were greater than other men now are, 


640. Exemples,where Conjunctions are Coples. 
Viſne tu ſpuere, an non vis? Will ye play, or will ye not? 
iniſtra manus gerit ſcutum, & dextra manus tenet gladium. | 
0% men do die, and young men get their riches. I 
Vita noſtra fugit, horæque volant. Time fect and Death cane. 
porci gerunt aſperas ſetas, oves guoque habent mollem lanam. 
ig, uſe to eat foul meats, dogs allo devour dead fleſh. | 
fader aut ſecat lignum, aut parat inſtrumenta ſua, 

Fither keep tho order in the School, or leave the School. 

Multi 224% ſunt falſi dit, 2%½ eſt unus verus Deus. 

Iſany nen indeed are taught, but ſeib men are learned. 

E Herus legit, vos vero luditis, or vos autem luditis. 

Ego cædo te, guia malus es, We love you, becauſe you are good 
Non decet me ſequi vos, zam vos (or vos enim) omnes elt is cœci. 
I. becomes all you to hear me, for I have alævays been wiſe. 
E Tota ſchola jam ibit in campos, i (or Ai Magiltri vetant. 


I vain men are exerciſed in 2 unleſs (if not) 

Nuanguam ¶ guameis tu habe“ magnas opes, tamen es pauperrimus. 
Although the path of life be narrow, yet the juſt man walls in it. 

have not done ſo, as the thing requires, 


6 II. The Uſe of the Subjunctive Mood. 


eue [id No. 5 20. that Verb ef the Subjun®. Mord rouge to be put 
ler other Verbs in a Compounded Sentence, now ſhew me Horb they are /q put. 
641. 4. The Subjunctive Mood is to be uſed in Compounded Sengnces, 


| ood ifElled the Optative or Wiſhing Mood. "1-0 
3. Sometimes after /i, ni, niſi, cum, quamwvis, &c. as here you ſee. , 
642. I. In the firſt Conjugat. Præſ. or Fut. Impert.- 


The matter 
requirꝭ that 


perfect. 


» 


/ 

| 
1 ve - 
re 
| 

| 

| 

| 


_ 
* 
13 * 


1 

1 

j 

| 

i 

1 
43 o 


the Rules be true. 


d 


« 


and ye that not. 


that, and they, the Subjunct. ba 
RR. 


1 ſhould walk| © * ö 
Thiu GHoul bowl .. | 
The ſoldier ſhould fight 0 
Me fhould cry ” 

Je fpould wail 

Tiers ſoould| totter 


Rt. = 4 5 
TI was lHalfhſting 
pa waſt ſuhping 
Ws Witneſs was ſwearing 
Ae were walking 
05 were windring 4 
Wolves were| bowling. 
oY 
| 


044 In 


* 


k 
4 * 
t 
1 
{ 
* 
+: 1 
1 £ 
1 
1 4 
1 F 
q 4 
1 oy 
19 3 
* 
} | 
} 4 
y 1 
1 
| 
[1 
n 8 | 
} ' 
WS / 
n ! 
13% 
1 ny 
2 
1 
104 
1 


L 
* 1 
10 
14 
14 

N . 
1 \ 

+5 

{ ® 


„ 
an 7 ws. Ee Ws _—_ 2 2 * — — 
3 N _ _— — —— 
. — — — == 
N — — — 
— 2 — 
= 


| Sentences together. 


| Rules. | 


6. The Genitive 5 t. After another Subſtantive, by R. VIII. 


98 The Summ ck the XIII. Phzaſe-Rules. Chap. XI 


— | 
644. In the Præterperf. Subj. | N 
Ego pugnaverim | I have reigned . 
Tu naveris Thou haſt lowed © Pr 
Omnes Iplanca crepaverit Ai min The 8 has flown : 
cont Nos clamaverimus ee bow We have wailed f 
0 2 that Z I 
ane Vos erraverltis : Ye have /wum 2. 
(Domus vacaverint The winds have breathe] K 
645. In the Præterpluperf. Optative. ] 
F.go cœnaviſſem Had cried out ! . C 
= A Tu jentaviſſes! pu haaſt howled! J Q 
S Jada ſtetiſſet! Ie Town had wailed! ' 
Nos erraviſſemus ! o We had fwimmed I 
Oos migraviſetis ! Ye had flown ! 1 N 
Roſæ ſpiraviſſent! Men had conſider' d] l 
646. In the Future Perfect Subjunctive. J 
Ego ccenavero I ſhall have walked 
, Tu jentaveris „Ibo ſhalt have ſupped b 
"At 1 1 Woh ambulaverit Fa JF JThe Cat ſhall 3 2 u 
mite MC Nos clamaverimus 75 Me ſhall have brealfaſted E ;. 
ag Vos plantaveritis e fhall have cryed out I 
Teſtes juraverint The Citizens ſhall have fin WM 
N. B. So the other Conjugations may be gone through. T 


CHAP. XIX. The Summ of all ſaid before about pit. 
ting Words together to make Sentenses. 


647. N. B. I. N Interjection moſtly maketh a ſenſe by itſelf. 
| A 648. II. A Conjunction is only uſed to join too 


649. III. The other fix parts of Speech are put into Sentences by XIII 


K * D 9 1 
WWW 


F. III. The Summ of the XIII. Phraſe- Rules, 


650. I. In every ſimple Sentence there is one Verb Finite, and but on, 
which agrees with its Nominative Caſe by R. II. 
683. II. A Noun, Pronoun, or Participle if it be a Sομbive of 
| Fhe Vocatiee Caſe is only uſed after O, to call by, by R. I. 
„The Nom. Caſe F 1. Before a Fer Finite, by R. II. 
is uſed either $4 Or after Verbs of Being, &c. by R. III. 
5 e 1. Before Verbs Infinite, by M. 542. 


1 


—— — — — 


13 


12 


ks 0 


Caſe is uſed upon 2. After Verbs Tran/itive, by R. IV. 
three accounts 3. Aſter the firſt 27 Prep. c. by R. VI. No. 5675, 0 
4. The Ablative only after the 12. Prep. by R. VI. Ny. 568, 569. 
5, The Dative F 1. After Verbs put Acguiſitively, by R. VIE 
is uſed either 2 2. Aiter 4djetives, by R. XII. 


is uſed either & 2. Or after Adjectives of 45i//ty, &c. by R. XIII, 
„652. III. A Noun, Pronoun or Participle Adjective ever agrees with ib 
Subltantive in Cafe, Gender and Number, by R. X. 1 
3 


8 » Ä __ 
— — — —Uñä—ũ. . — 3 a — — 
* —— — . ͤ — 


Al chap. XX. TTloꝛds left out in a Sentence, 99 


| 653. LV. Adverbs and 5 Either 1. to Verbs, by R. V. 
E Prepoſitions are joined Or 2. to Adject. or other words, by R. XI. 

E 654. NMB. Infinite Verbs and Part. are both Nouns and Verbs, and fo 
: |, Infinite Verbs, Supines and Gerunds being Subſt. are uſed as other Subſt. 
2. Other Participles being Adjectives follow the Rules of Adjectives. 

J 3. All theſe conſidered as Verbs have ſuch Caſes as their Verbs have. 


ö CHAP. XX. What Words may be left out in a Sentence. 


1 IS there any thing more yet to be noun about Sentences|? 
| 655. A. Two things are yet to be known about Sentences. 
I. That whatever Words may be as well underſtood when left out, as 
E th:y would be, if they were mentioned, may be left ont. 
; Q. Upon what accounts may this be aone? | 
656. A. Words may be left out upon four Accounts. 
Q. Firſt, When may words be left out? | 
| 657. 4. When a word has been mentioned juſt before, and may be 
E {uppoled to be kept in mind, then it is oft left out, as, Ca G matt, 
| 7 o1cit, you need not ſay, Cæſar venit, & Cæſar vidit, & Cae/ar vicit. 
Nos ſcripſimus, plus quam vos I have eaten more, than we 
ite He veſtis eſt patris, 2g. veſtis This back is the maſler's, fe. Boos 

E Cujus eſt hic liber? R. meus hoſe houſe is this? A. ours 

| 6:8. Therefore in a Relative Sentence, the Antecedent word is ſeldom 
pu. repeated, but be ſure you fetch it over in your thought; as, 

Ego amo Chriſtum, qui me emit I Jong bt the books which be there 

Tu habes uxorem, quam non amas The wine is bad, which you ſent me 
| Vides templum, quod Rex ſtruxit V teach boys, which learn nothing 
on ti0 Wi Quem ſermonem audis, non eſt meus hat words I. ſpake, thoſe I deny 

| Q. When, ſecondly, may woras be left out? | 
XII 659. 4. II. When any word is to be mentioned ſtraight, if it can well 
be underſtood, it may be left out in the former part; as, 
0 | Placent populo, quas facio fabulas Drink ye red, or white wine 
4 Audio & miror tua verba J ever did, and ever will love you 


but one, J Unus Ce eee Tore firſt of the King, is dead 


led 
ed 


Una ex puellarum The ſecond of the Queens is fled 
num numero temploram The beſt of the Churches is burnt 

| Q. When, thirdly, may a word be left out? | 

bo. A. III. When the thought is expreſſed by ſome other means; as, 
Vis ef ille? pointing to a man, you need not ſay, Dnis hams, eſt ille homo? 
| Q. When, fourthly, may words be left out ? 

| 661. A. IV. Thoſe words which upon the mentioning of others, muſt 
needs be ſuppoſed to be meant, may be left out; as, When you come to Paul's 
ben turn to the left, every body knows you mean Paul's Church and the t 
band, therefore thoſe words need not to be expreſſed. 


See Exemples of this in ſeveral Phraſes. | 

XII. WW 62: In the 1. Phraſe the Interjection may be left out, and the Vocative 

withits only expreſſed ; as, Cur tu mentiris, Petre? Parce mihi, Domine. | 
| 663. In the 2. Phraſe the Nominative, when, upon mentioning the Verb, 

67 M is certainly known, need not to be expreſſed; as, to | 


8 2 Ama 


12 of 


575509 
. 


— 


4 T 
1 __ — A — — — l 
— — G — | 5 = * - 2 8 8 EDN . 
_ — we. I 4s — wa * — ZI * 33 * n —_— 
— — 5 — * — , * — — » 2 
« * - P an hs tn - — n. wo 3 * — — b — * 22 = —— — 
— — — —— — - - 8 — * Rom Gros. * — om T = . — —— - * — — - —_— <> — = —— — — Sm — 4 IK m5 — 2 2 — — 
: 2 2 5 2 — 
— . 4 
— _- _—_ * — 2 : * k . > - — ghar * — 
* — CET III, Rn _— - —_ 1 8 b y . 8 Ls ——_— 3 — , — 5 f . — - — = £ = — 
5 * NY — — — . Fg * * h — — — 
* 4 4 * — — 1 — 
yl 8 — * ACA" the TW ; I an _ — 4 * — — - hi 
* — 3 Ns N . 4 6 . g — —— — 7 * : 2 — 
2 1 ——— ——— — — — — - — — 5 E 
2 — . . — — — =. _ - 
. 3 —ß— - = — — * — — * a — > * - 
ZI . — = — 
— * - , ” _ ö , = 
* 9 * * L . by 4 
4 + 
Yar a r 1 f 3 
— 2 — 8 - — — rr 2 r * * 2 
* * * 


— — 


10⁰ Moꝛds left out in a Sentence. Chap, xy 
Amo, amabam, docebo, lego, legam, T0 Ty 
Amas, amabas, ama, docebis, legis, audi, 
Amamus, docemus, legebamus, audi mus, 
Amatie, amate, docetote, legetis, audite, 
Aiunt te furere. Dicunt Regem venire, 
Pluit, grandinat, fulminat 22 
N. B. But you cannot ſay amat, docebat, legunt, audient, &c. 217⁰1tö 
Nom. Cafe, becauſe none can know what it is that loves, teaches, &. j 
may be Pater amat, or mater amat, or canis amat, or uxor, &c. 
664. In the VI. Phraſe, 1. Sometimes the Prepoſition is left oy 
2. Sometimes its Caſe. 3. Sometimes both. _ Sn ; 


8. 1. The Prepoſition is left out in 12 places. 
665. 1. The the IHrument by which any thing is done, is uſuly 
word chat ſig- the Cauſe for which put in the Ablative Caſe with. 
nifies | the Manner after which Yout a Prepoſition; as, 
Findimus radicem quercũs raltro Wi. dig our Gardens with ſpages 
Pungimus boves pigros acu 4 bald crown is veiied with a furijy 
Diſcipuli tacent metu They puniſh a flow boy with the ri 
Gaudemus rebus tuis proſperts Rejoice not for the death of anither 
Sentio me eſſe laſſum ſcribendo T jee that yo are tired with playing 
O mnes homines ſunt pares natura A ſpeech is made with much care 
666. 2. The word of Price, at which a thing is rated, is put in ths 
Ablative Caſe without the Prepoſition ; as, 
Jentabamus hodie tribus aſſivus We dined yeſerday for one as 
Emi duos libros uno ſemiſſe 1 fold my ba: for three half aſſes 
Gemmz venduntur vili pretio They jel: jewels at an huge price 
Except the Genitives, Lanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, &g 
667. 3. After words ſigniſying to be V or empty of any thing, the Ab- 
lative Caſe is {et down without the Prepoſition; as, | 
Hic faccus eſt plenus hamis Theje ſachs are full of aſhes 
Tuum cerebrum eſt inane virtute That barre! was empty of ale, 
Mater mea eſt vidua viro ſuo My brother is widowed of his miſe 
So egcre and carere have an Avlat. without a Prepoſition; as, 
Sum dives quanquam caream nummis Eu can't read if you want a bt 
Homo pauper cget omnibus rebus Your pipes need à flrong wind 
668. 4. Fungor, fraor, utor, potior; dignus, indignus, have an Ali. 
Caſe without a Prep. ass © | | | 
Jaſtus vir fungitur officio ſuo 
Acer miles fruitur triumpho 
Anus macra utitur baculo ſuo Fat old men uſc their ſtaffs 
Manus larga eſt digna laude Bad works are unworthy of fame _ 
669. 5. Ad is left out before 745 and domus, and Proper Names of 
Towns; as, ES ent | | | 
Hodie iturus ſum Londinum Many men are going to Rome 
Jubeo, mi fili, ut eas domum Go and carry this burthen home 
Jam ibimus rus, ibique venabimur O child, flee thou into the count!) 
970, II. After Verbs of notion the firſt Supine is put, and 4d left out; 


Nas and therefor 
| they may de 
Homines N left out. 


o word can be 
he Nom. C. but 
* 
2 


Unju/t men diſcharge not their dutit 
Smart ſoldiers enjoy triumphs _ 


48, 
1 

E0 
50 


9 


ö. XI NCueb. XX. Wozds left out in a Sentence, | 101 

— ; 2 1 — ory wm — — 8 es 
Wo/amatum Came ye hither to ſleep ? 

therefor, Veni viſum te 8 We go to bear Sermons 8 

may de adimus venatum T am going to accuſe the Scholars 


651. 6. Before the meaſure of time or ſpace, ad or per is left out in 
Latin, and through or for in Engliſh; as, | | 

Frotam hyemem dormis Bees gather honey all the ſummer 
arolus regnavit triginta annos T have been here a while hour 

Hic liber eſt craſſus tres digitos That river is ten foot broad 

672. 7. A, ab, or ex ſignifying f?om a place, coming before rus, domus, 


Out. 


thimt th 
Of. i 


eft ou, End the Proper Names of 'Towns 1s left out ; as, | 
nde venis? Venio rure The goats are come out of the Country 
pater dudum exivit domo When came your ſon from home 
Epiſcopus'olim migravit Roma De Queen hath remov'd from London 
ny WP 675; 8. In before rus, and Proper Names of Towns is left out; as, 
le nit » Thy ſolent venari rure Hares uſe to lurk in the Country 
© MWOnnes artes valebant Athenis Scipio beat Hannibal at Carthage — 
654. But if the Name of the Town be of the rſt or ſecond Declenſion, 
perils end of the Singular Number, it muſt be put in the Genitive, and in urbe 
Yeft out; as, | | | | 
bY uid faciam Rome? for in urbe RomzWhat will ye do at London? 
"wx N. B. So humi, domi, militiæ, belli, are uſed in the Genitive; as, 
44 omi bellique ſimul viximus I tarry at home, thou at war 
in th: 675. 9. In before words of time, is oft left out; as, 
Stelle lucent nocte, non die We ſtudy a- days, not a-nights 
Nives non cadunt menſe Julio Hail hath often fallen in Auguſt 
” . 2. How to turn a Compounded Sentence into a Simple 
5 one by the Ablative Caſe Abſolute. 
e Ab- | 


676. 10. When we are to expreſs that @ thing is, does or ſuffers, when, 
While, or after that any thing is, does, or ſuffers, we may | | 
| 1. Caſt away the Coples, hen, while, after. | | 
wh 2. Then turn the Nominative after them into the Ablative Caſe. 
3. Turn the Verb into a Participle Adj. to agree with it, leaving out 
11 ſhe Prepolition, and this is called the Ablative Caſe abſolute. 
N. B. 1f the Verb be put Imperfectly turn it into ans, ens, or jens; 45, 
4, om Rex veniret, hoſtes fugerunt Rege veniente, hoſtes fugerunt 
Pam Magilter docet, pueri ludunt Magiſtro docente, pueri Judunt 
rum nos cœnabimus, tibiæ ſonabunt Nobis cœnantibus, tibiæ ſonabunt 


uti e ; | TE 3 | 
= an B. But if it ſignify Perſectly, change it into the Participle in tus, ſus, 
| oltquam fol eſſet ortus, ivi venatum Sole orto, ivi venatum 


cs of i.” ædes fuiſfent purgatæ, ancilla dormivit Ædibus purgatis, anc. &c. 
n cauſa eſt judicata, latro ſuſpenditur Torre accenſo, quærimus libros. 


| 


7 Imitations. 
bile the Maſter exhorts, the men dig The Maſter exhorting, 


7 th . the Nen dig 
40e barber clips, the bairs fall When « gale 8/5ws, the boughs move 


— 
— 
' 
2. 


- 


102 Wo2ds left out in a Sentence. Chap. xy 


The fþjh being caught, the net is taken up The Majjer raging, the boys tren 
Aﬀter the doors are ſput, ye can't enter The wife ſeen, the husband fled F 
677. 11. Words of the Comparative Dezr-e ſignifying more ſo than 10. 
ther thing, may have after them the Name of that thing in the Ablatne 
without the Prep. as, | 
Hic vir eſt mollior muliere, 7. e. preThat woman is ftouter than a my 
Pater meus eſt hilarior matre My /i/ter is ſadder than my brither 

Tu videris ſurdior omnibus ſaxis I /eem brisher than a live flame 
678. 12. After Verbs of Warning, Accuſine, Condemning and Acgiittin 
the Prepoſition d is oft left out; as, 4 
Ego condemnabo te eodem crimine 77z are accuſed of many Crimes 
679. F. II. Sometimes the Caſe is left out; as, d, ,, 


Pater jam exivit, OZ. domo Drive you Cit ihe dog, Viz j P 
I pre, ſcquar, viz. pre me { will go before, viz. yo 
Pon: venit conjux, 9/2. me Come you behind, z. of 


680. F. III. Sometimes both the Prep. and its Caſe ag left en 
So I. After Verbs of warning, accuſing, condemning and acrgquitting 0 
mine may be left out, becauſe none are accaſed but of a crime; as, 
Acculo te furti, i. e. de crimine furti 274 are accuſed F adultery 
Condemnamus vos doli mali You condemn as of evil frauds * 
681. S0 II. All words put Partitivehy, i. e. denoting part out of many 
have a Genit. after them, ex numero being underitood ! as, i»/7ead if Tas 
unus ex numero Diſcipulorum, Tu es unus Diſcipulorum. 
Magiſter cecidit ſeptem puerorum AT fav three of the Magiſtrates 
David Rex fuit primus poetarum More of the girls can read 


Pauci virorum ſunt boni Ten of the Apoſtles were ſlain 
Alter fratrum cecidit in bello The other of the ſiſters is faireſt 

632. In the VII. Phr. the Dative when known may be left out; as, 
Da panem, vz. mihi Reach the cup, i. e. to me ; 


58 3. In the VIII. Phr. the firſt Subſtantive may be left out, iz. when 
upon hearing the ſecond, it is well enough underſtood; as, 
Venimus ad Pauli, viz. templum When you COmay? St. Peter's, flo 
684. In the IX. One of the Subſtantives is Mt out, viz. when, Ge. a 
Munquam vidi Regem, g. Carolum My father is come to town, i. e. Lind, 
685. In the X. The Adjective omitted when eaſily underſtood; as, 
Mnſtra te virum, pig. fortem Se ſhews berſelf a woman, i. e. wil 
Eſpecially the Poſſeſſives mens, tas, ſuns, moter, veſter, are ſo left out; a, 
Vidiſtine Patrem hodie? g, tuum WWher? is your ſiſter ? 
Tu ita te geris erga matrem ? Hoco carry ye yourſelves ill to your Mr.? 
686. The Subſtantive is moſt freqqently omitted. 4 
i. H:mo 1s leſt out; as, 


Quis me vocat ? | Whom ao ye call? 

juvenis fiet ſenex | The yeung deſire to be old 

\micus juvabit amicum * The friendly love the friend!) 

Pauperes cupiunt videri divites The rich deſpiſe the poor 

Dominus novit viam piorum T0 day I heard one preaching en 
Rex & Regina ſunt beati, vg. homines The #:an and his wife are righte 


22 


587. 2. Menſis is left out in the twelve names of the Months; as, 


1 * . : » <<" — 
—— — — r . . MR =" —— CESS...” — 


| r 
88 — *. LOS 0 * 1 - 


AX Chap, XXI. Moꝛds franſplaced in a Sentence, 103 


* Rex mortuus eſt ſexto die Februarii We began the fifth of October 1 
Hic eſt primus dies Januarii And ended the eighth of December 
d 688. 3. Manus is oft underſtood as Hand in Engliſh; as, 


"py Chriſtus ſedet ad dextram Patris Turn you to the right | 
* Cur prehendis me ſiniſtra T will go to the left | 
a | 689. 4. Negotium and Oficium in Latin, and Thing or Ad in Engliſh are 
. frequently left out when they may be underſtood; as, 
18 Lupus eſt triſte ſtabulis 20 write a ſhort letter is eaſy | 
4 Mentiri non eft meum To number the ſand of the Sea is hard 
omnia ſunt miſera in bello It's rare to ſee a wiſe woman 

Recte agere intereſt veſtra It concerns you to be goud 

1. . eſt inter veſtra negotia *1.e. It is among your concerns 
puerorum eſt (officium) parere Ma-1?'s your duty to obey Kings 
giltris | | | 


FS. 3. Words left out in a Compound Sentence: 


Q. What Words may be left out in the Compounded Sentence? 
690. A. In a Compounded Sentence, * 
1. Sometimes the firſt Sentence is left out, that is when they 
WE: Sometimes the Cople is left out, | 8 are as well un- 
. Sometimes both the firit Sentence and the Cople; N 
Le 691. Sometimes the firſt Sentence is omitted; as, | 
Ius btinam cecidiſfes in bello: ſupply O. 
b 692. Sometimes the Cople is 5 as, = 
Velim, cures ſalutem tuam, 1. e. Welim ut, &c. | 
Rogo, ſcribas ad me de iſta re, for t ſcribas. | 
F | 693. 3- Sometimes both the firlt Sent. and the Cople are left out; as, 
Fas per me in malam crucem, 7. % /icet ut eas, &c. | * 
IScribas ad me de rebus omnibus, Te. fac Fr icribas, Qc. 


e The Cople Thar left out in the Engliſh. 
| 694 NM. B. The Cople hat is oft left out in Engliſh, but notin Latin ; as, 
100 Ldeſire (that) you 200uld ſup with ne Rogo ut cœnes mecun | 


1 I think I jaw bim, i. e. that I, &. Puto me vidiſſe illum | 
7 9 1 . . | 
Ln We came after the rain was over, i. e. after that, not poſt St poſtquam 


* 


t; 35, 


3 ® , Wh? were here before we came, i. e. before that, not ante but antequam 
© 3" WW 695. Especially when it is Relative t, which, who, whim, may be 
t outs 5 bn Exgliſh omitted, but not in Latin; as, | | 
_ % is the horſe T fold to you Hic eſt equus guem tibi vendidi 
ive me the book you bought Da mihi librum quem emiſti 
ks this the reward Je ſpoke of, i. e. of Hoccine eſt premium de quo locuti 
S cobich ? Ff | | 
CHAP.XXI.T hetVords in a Sentence may be tranſplaced. 
y | WW 7s the ſecond thing to be obſerved about Sentence: FP : 
696. A. II. The Latins uſe not to place the words of à Sen- 
5 ence always in their natural order as they lie in ſenſe, but put them into 
teu uach order as will ſound ſweeteſt to the ear, but ſo that the ſenſe be not 
3 28, hereby detkned. | 
| | 
Re 


if 


W Hm 


* WJ 7 2 9 
N az 
5 


Cd * 


of N Peri . 
24 . - y " 
9 Os * Ss . p 


104 | Wo:2ds franſplaced in a Sentence. Chap, KN 


Q. How may the words of a Sentence be thus tranſpoſed ? n 

697. A4. I. A Sentence of v9 words may be put evo ways; 1, 
Ego vivo or vivo ego. Dominus dicit or dicit Dominus. * 

698. II. If there be three words in a Sent. it may be put fix wi] 
Vivimus vitam brevem Vitam vivimus brevem Brevem vitam Win 
Vivimus brevem vitam Vitam brevem vivimus Brevem vivimus iy 


So turn ars eſt longa Vita eſt brevis ' Meeſta mors venit, c 

699. III. A Sentence of for words may be put 24 ways, as in this Yo 
may begin ſix times with vive. . And ſix times with memoy, 
Vive memor mortis venientis Memor vive mortis venientis 
Vive memor venientis mortis Memor vive venientis mortis 
Vive mortis memor venientis Memor mortis venientis vive 
Vive mortis venientis memor Memor mortis vive venientis 
Vive venientis mortis memor Memor venientis mortis vive 
Vive venientis memor mortis Miemor venientis vive mortis 

And fix times with ortis And fix times with venientii. 


So turn animalia viva debent mori, and ſomnus premit vigiles oculos,6e; 

700. IV. A Sent. of five words may be put 120 ways; as in this 
ma begin 24 times with Chri/us, and 24 times with every other word 
Chriſtus emit homines ſanguine ſuo Chriſtus emit ſanguine homines ſuo 
Chriſtus emit homines ſuo ſanguine Chriſtus emit ſanguine ſuo homines, 

So turn Cives cinxerunt murum gemino vallo. 

701. V. A Sentence of {ix words may be changed 720 ways, beginning 
120 times with each of theſe ſix words; as, 
Pueri ſolent urgere parentes frequentibus epiſtolis, &c, | 

Q. May we then miſplace all words in every Sentence as we pleaſe ? 

-02. A. No, not always, but you muſt in this as in all other thing 
follow the uſe of the beſt Speakers, of which you ſhall have Direction 
in the next Book. 

N. B. Some words in Engliſh are tranſplaced which you muſt ſet right. 

703. A. The Prepoſition is ſometimes ſet the laſt word in the Sentenct; w, 
Hy loſs of time I blame you fir. i. e. blame you for the loſs of my tine. 

Eſpeclally in Interrogative and Relative Sentences ; as, 

What fpeak you that for? i. e. For what ſpake you that ? 
hom do you ſpeak again/? ? What place came you from ? 
This is the man that I ſpske to you of, 1. e. of whom I ſpoke ? 2 

704. Oft we put the Nominat. after the Verb, and before it ſet Tu, 
for which there is no Latin word; as, | 
There was a man, i. e. A man was, Fuit homo. 

There came a boy to me, Venit ad me puer quicam. | 

705. If the Nominative Caſe to the Verb be a Verb Infinite, or a der 
tence, we uſually ſet it after the Verb Finite, and put it before it; * 
It is an evil thing to lyc, i. e. to lye is an evil thing; malum eſt ment 
It is the cuſtem of Boys to gt their maſters; Puerorum mos eſt ſpernere, G 


Setis off fi nen minis. 


EF 1-0 & 


